JP2007282884A - Slot machine using game ball - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine using game balls which can efficiently carry out control associated with automatic stoppage of a variable display device. <P>SOLUTION: A CPU 41a controls reels to stop depending on how win flags are set excluding that the last to stop free from stop operation or automatic stop control. In the case of the automatic stop control, it controls the stopping of the reel alone the last to stop so as to make no winning combination line up on any winning lines. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and in particular, setting a bet number using a game ball The present invention relates to a slot machine using a game ball capable of playing a game.

  The slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel starts to rotate by operating a start lever. Further, when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  In addition, in order for a winning determined for each slot machine to occur, the winning flag must be set by winning the internal lottery performed in advance (usually at the start operation) (although other conditions are not met) May be added). In other words, the occurrence of a prize in the slot machine is determined by at least an element that depends on the chance of setting a winning flag and an element that is not affected by the chance of stopping at a timing at which a display result corresponding to the prize can be derived. It will be.

  By the way, even if the rotation of each reel constituting the variable display device is stopped by a stop operation by the player, if it is kept rotating from the start operation, it is practical even if the player is playing a game. It is not possible to obtain a sufficient operating rate. Therefore, in the conventional slot machine, when the elapsed time after the predetermined condition is satisfied after the reel starts to rotate reaches the predetermined time, the reel is still not rotated and stopped. The reel is regarded as having been stopped and its rotation is forcibly stopped.

  However, because the reel rotation was forcibly stopped over time as if the stop button had been operated, the display result corresponding to the winning with the winning flag set is the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed. If the timing is such that the player can derivation, a winning may occur even if the player does not perform the stop operation himself. This was not a preferable state for the purpose of ensuring the suppression of shooting characteristics by suppressing the occurrence of a prize due to chance by a player's technical intervention.

  For this reason, when the reel rotation is forcibly stopped over time, that is, when it is automatically stopped, even if a specific prize is won by internal lottery, the display result corresponding to the loss is always displayed on the variable display device. As a result, a slot machine that is controlled to be derived has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-31466 A

  However, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, in the case where the rotation of the reels is automatically stopped as time elapses, a plurality of reels, for example, three reels, are stopped first when all of them are rotating. Switch to the control to remove the display result corresponding to the winning from the reel to be played, and when any one is stopped, switch to the control to remove the display result corresponding to the winning from the reel that stops second, and any two stopped In the state, since it was necessary to switch to the control for removing the display result corresponding to the winning only for the reel to be stopped at the end, the control accompanying the automatic stop was complicated.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a slot machine using a game ball capable of efficiently performing control associated with automatic stop of a variable display device. To do.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a slot machine using a game ball according to claim 1 of the present invention,
Variable display device (reel) capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols (designs) each identifiable 2L, 2C, 2R)
A take-in device (take-in device 100) for taking in a player-owned game ball (pachinko ball);
A take-in request operation unit (one-ball take-in switch 5, MAXBET switch 6) which is operated when requesting take-in of game balls;
When the capture request operation unit is operated, capture control means for performing capture control (capture control processing) for causing the capture device to perform a capture operation for capturing the game ball by the capture device ( CPU 41a)
Bet number setting means (BET process by the CPU 41a) for setting the bet number in accordance with the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
When a predetermined number of bets (1 or 3) are set for one game by the bet number setting means, the game can be started and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) using a game ball in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result of at least one variable display area is derived;
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Timing start means (a process of setting an automatic stop time and starting timing) based on the fact that a predetermined timing start condition after the start of the game is satisfied (reel rotation start);
When the deriving operation means is operated (when a reeling operation that is fluctuating is performed), and when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measuring means starts timing (after the reel starts rotating) , When the automatic stop time elapses), derivation instruction means for instructing that the display result is derived in the variable display area (processing for storing the stop operation position in the workpiece of the changing reel),
When the derivation instructing means instructs that the display result is derived to the variable display area (when the stop operation position is stored in the workpiece of the changing reel), the display result of the variable display area is derived. Derivation control means for controlling (reel stop control by the CPU 41a),
With
The derivation control means includes
When the derivation instruction means instructs the derivation display means to derive the display result by operating the derivation operation means (the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated to operate the corresponding reel work Control of the reel by the stop control table generated based on the data creation table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery (when the stop operation position is stored in the table) ), The operation-time derivation control means that performs control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means (stops the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table) Control), and
When the predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed and the derivation instructing means instructs that the display result is derived in the variable display area (the stop operation position is set on the reel work that is changing due to the automatic stop). Automatic control to derive display results to the variable display area that is still changing so that the combination of display results is a combination that does not constitute a prize when all the variable display areas are derived. Derivation control means (control to stop the reels so that no winning line is available),
Including
The automatic derivation control means, for a variable display area (reel other than the final stop reel) other than the last variable display area for finally deriving the display result, based on the control pattern according to the determination result of the prior determination means Control for deriving the display result of the variable display area (reel stop control by a stop control table generated based on the data creation table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery) is performed, and the final variable display area (final stop reel) With respect to, control based on the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determining means, and the control of deriving the display result in which the combination of the display results does not constitute a winning combination when all the variable display areas are derived ( Regardless of the result of the internal lottery, control is performed to stop the last stop reel that is moving at the stop position where no winning line is available. Perform,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control for deriving the display result to the variable display area is performed because a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed regardless of the operation of the derivation operation means (hereinafter also referred to as automatic stop). Even if the occurrence of any winning is permitted by the predetermining means, the display result combination is displayed so that the combination of the display results does not constitute a winning, that is, the combination of loses, when all the variable display areas are derived. Since the result is derived, it is possible to prevent a prize from being generated only by the contingency factor, and it is possible to ensure the suppression of shooting characteristics.
In addition, except for the variable display area where the display result is finally derived, control is performed according to the determination result of the pre-decision means regardless of whether the stop operation means is operated or automatic stop. Since the control is performed so that only the variable display area from which the display result is derived at the end does not constitute a combination that does not constitute a winning combination, the stop operation means has been operated except for the variable display area from which the display result is derived at the end. Regardless of whether it is automatic stop or not, it is only necessary to perform control to derive the display result in the variable display area based on a common control pattern. Even when is added, the reel stop control is not complicated.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 2 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
The variable display device fluctuates by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A display device for deriving and displaying a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) that can be displayed;
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs that the display result is derived in the variable display area (when the stop operation position is stored in the workpiece of the reel being changed) From a plurality of control patterns (reel stop control by the stop control table) that uniquely specify the display result (stop position) derived for (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) The derivation instruction means that the display result is derived to the determination result of the article predetermination means (internal lottery result) and the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived. Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time pointed by (stop operation position of the stopped reel) (when any one reel is stopped, Including a process for uniquely selecting a data creation table corresponding to the result of the lottery and the stop operation position of the stopped reel, and creating a stop control table corresponding to the changing reel from the selected data creation table). ,
The operation time derivation control means and the automatic derivation control means are instructed by the derivation instructing means to derive the display result in a variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived (to the workpiece of the changing reel). When the stop operation position is stored), the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection unit for the variable display area is uniquely determined from the number of steps at the time when the derivation instruction unit instructs to derive the control pattern. While performing the control to derive the specified display result as the display result of the variable display area (control to stop the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table),
The derivation of the control pattern selecting means may cause the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived to derive the display result even when the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is the same. Different control pattern selection means (already stopped) for selecting a different control pattern for a variable display area for which a display result has not yet been derived when the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time pointed by the instruction means is a different number of steps Even if the stop positions of the reels are the same, if the stop operation position of the stopped reels is different, a different data creation table is selected, and the reel that is changing from the selected data creation table is selected. Create a stop control table),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result has not yet been derived. Predetermined from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when it is instructed to be derived by the derivation instructing means for the variable display area for which no is derived The control pattern corresponding to the step result of the stepping motor at the time when the determination result of the means and the fact that the display result is derived to the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is instructed by the derivation instruction means is uniquely selected, Control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. That is, the determination result of one pre-determining means is applied to the number of steps of one stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs that the display result is derived in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived. Since there is only one control pattern, it is not necessary to further select any one of the plurality of control patterns, and the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device is not complicated.
In addition, according to the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived, the control pattern of the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is not selected, but the variable display for which the display result has already been derived. The control pattern of the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is uniquely selected according to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs the area to derive the display result. In addition, even if the display results of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived are the same, the derivation instructing means has instructed that the display result is derived to the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived. If the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time is different, select a different control pattern for the variable display area for which display results have not yet been derived. Possible it is. That is, when the derived display result is derived, the display result is still derived at the timing when the instruction to derive the display result is derived from the deriving instruction unit (the timing when the operation is performed by the deriving operation unit). Since it is possible to change the control pattern of the variable display area that has not been done, rather than selecting the control pattern of the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived according to the display result that has been derived as in the past, The display results of the variable display device can be diversified.
The control pattern that uniquely specifies the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs the variable display area to derive the display result. This is a control pattern in which the same display result is always specified as the derived display result when the number of steps at the time when the instruction means instructs to derive the display result in the variable display area is the same. Each step number, or a step number unit that is continuous within a certain range (for example, the number of steps required for one symbol to fluctuate), or an identification code that can identify the step number unit (for example, a symbol number). The derivation instructing means derives the display result in the variable display area from the variation amount table in which the variation amount until the display result is derived is determined. Identifies the control pattern that uniquely identifies the display result derived for the number of steps at the time when the command is specified, the number of individual steps, or the number of steps consecutive in a certain range, or the number of steps Derived from the priority table in which the priority of the derived display result is determined for each identification code with respect to the number of steps at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs the variable display area to derive the display result. This includes a control pattern that uniquely identifies the display result. Further, from the number of steps at the time when it is instructed to derive the display result in the variable display area by the derivation instructing means, the pull-in control is performed so that the display result to be drawn is maximized within a predetermined pull-in range, In order to prevent the display result from derivation being prohibited, in the case of kicking control that pulls in the display result other than the display result for which derivation is prohibited, an instruction is given that the display result is derived to the variable display area by the derivation instruction means. If the display result derived from the number of steps at the time point is uniquely specified, it corresponds to the control pattern of the present invention.
In addition, the control corresponding to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs that the display result is derived in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived and the determination result of the predetermining means. When the pattern is uniquely selected, the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same, and the derivation instruction unit instructs that the display result is derived to the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived. When the number of steps of the stepping motor is the same, the same control pattern is always selected, and the display result is derived when the determination result of the predetermining means is different or when the display result is already derived. A common control pattern is selected when the number of steps of the stepping motor is different when the derivation instructing means instructs It does not prevent that.
Further, to uniquely select a control pattern corresponding to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instruction means instructs that the display result is derived in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived, When the number of steps at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs that the display result is derived to the variable display area from which the display result is derived is to always select the same control pattern. Or a step number unit that is continuous within a certain range (for example, the number of steps required to change one symbol) or a control pattern corresponding to an identification code that can identify the step number unit You may choose.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 3 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
The variable display device fluctuates by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A display device for deriving and displaying a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) that can be displayed;
The derivation control means includes
In the situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, an instruction is given to cause the variable display area to derive display results for the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Display result derived for the number of steps of the stepping motor (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) at the time when the stop operation position is stored in the workpiece of the reel that is changing A control pattern corresponding to the determination result (internal lottery result) of the pre-determining means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns (reel stop control by the stop control table) that uniquely specify (stop position). Control pattern selection means (at the start of reel rotation, the data creation table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is uniquely selected, and the selected data Includes a processing) to create a stop control table for all of the reels from the table for forming,
When it is instructed by the derivation instructing means to derive the display result in the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived (when the stop operation position is stored in the changing reel work), the control pattern In the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the selection means, the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the instruction to be derived by the derivation instruction means is given as the display result of the variable display area Control to derive (control to stop the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table),
The control pattern selection means, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result (when no special role is won), the number of steps of at least one of the number of steps Specific display results ("replay watermelon bell" of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, "bell / red 7 / bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols, "replay blue" of the 15th to 17th symbols 7 / Watermelon ”) is specified as a reel based on a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which a display result constituting a chance eye with respect to any one stop operation position is a stop position is determined. Stop control), and the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result (when any special role is elected) ) A second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified from a greater number of steps than the first specific control pattern (stop control selected when no combination is won) Including specific control pattern selection means for selecting a reel stop control by a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which a display result constituting a chance position with respect to more stop operation positions than the table is a stop position is determined,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in a situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, a variable display area for which display results have not yet been derived has been instructed to be derived by the derivation instruction means. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number of steps of the stepping motor, and is displayed in the corresponding variable display area. Control is performed to derive the result. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to the determination result of one pre-determining unit, and it is not necessary to further select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns.
Further, when the determination result of the pre-decision means is the second determination result, the specific display result is specified from a larger number of steps than the first specific control pattern selected when the determination result is the first determination result. The second specific control pattern is selected and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. Therefore, when the determination result of the predetermination means is the second determination result, The specific display result is derived at a higher rate than when it is the determination result, and the specific display result is derived, whereby the determination result of the predetermining means is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result. It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the result is a second determination result.
For this reason, the interest by the display result of a variable display apparatus can be heightened, without complicating the control at the time of deriving the display result of a variable display apparatus.
The specific control pattern selection means selects the first specific control pattern only for any one of the variable display areas when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result, The first specific control pattern may be selected for any two or more variable display areas, or the first specific control pattern may be selected for all variable display areas. Similarly, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result, the second specific control pattern is selected only for any one of the variable display areas, or any two or more variable The second specific control pattern may be selected for the display area, or the second specific control pattern may be selected for all the variable display areas.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 4 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
The variable display device fluctuates by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A display device for deriving and displaying a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) that can be displayed;
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs that the display result is derived in the variable display area (when the stop operation position is stored in the workpiece of the reel being changed) From a plurality of control patterns (reel stop control by the stop control table) that uniquely specify the display result (stop position) derived for (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) The determination result of the article predetermination means (internal lottery result) and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived (stop position of the stopped reel) Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting the corresponding control pattern (when one of the reels stops, the data creation table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely selected. And a process for creating a stop control table corresponding to the changing reel from the selected data creation table)
When it is instructed by the derivation instructing means to derive the display result in the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived (when the stop operation position is stored in the changing reel work), the control pattern In the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the selection means, the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the instruction to be derived by the derivation instruction means is given as the display result of the variable display area Control to derive (control to stop the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table),
The control pattern selection means, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result (when no special role is won), the number of steps of at least one of the number of steps Specific display results ("replay watermelon bell" of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, "bell / red 7 / bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols, "replay blue" of the 15th to 17th symbols 7 / Watermelon ”) is specified as a reel based on a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which a display result constituting a chance eye with respect to any one stop operation position is a stop position is determined. Stop control), and the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result (when any special role is elected) ) A second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified from a greater number of steps than the first specific control pattern (stop control selected when no combination is won) Including specific control pattern selection means for selecting a reel stop control by a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which a display result constituting a chance position with respect to more stop operation positions than the table is a stop position is determined,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result is still Predetermined from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number of stepping motor steps at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs that the variable display area for which no is derived A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control is performed to derive the display result in the corresponding variable display area. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns There is no need to select further.
Further, when the determination result of the pre-decision means is the second determination result, the specific display result is specified from a larger number of steps than the first specific control pattern selected when the determination result is the first determination result. The second specific control pattern is selected and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. Therefore, when the determination result of the predetermination means is the second determination result, The specific display result is derived at a higher rate than when it is the determination result, and the specific display result is derived, whereby the determination result of the predetermining means is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result. It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the result is a second determination result.
For this reason, the interest by the display result of a variable display apparatus can be heightened, without complicating the control at the time of deriving the display result of a variable display apparatus.
The specific control pattern selection means is configured to select one of the variable display areas from which the display result has not yet been derived when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result. Only selecting the first specific control pattern, selecting the first specific control pattern for any two or more variable display areas among the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived, and still displaying results The first specific control pattern may be selected for all of the variable display areas from which the display results are not derived. Furthermore, the display results of the variable display areas from which the display results have already been derived are derived in a specific order. On the condition, the first specific control pattern may be selected for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. Similarly, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result, the second specific control pattern is applied only to any one of the variable display areas from which the display result has not yet been derived. For selecting the second specific control pattern for any two or more variable display areas among the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived, or for the variable display for which display results have not yet been derived The second specific control pattern may be selected for all of the areas, and further, on the condition that the display results of the variable display areas from which the display results have already been derived are derived in a specific order. The second specific control pattern may be selected for the variable display area for which the display result is not derived.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 5 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
The variable display device fluctuates by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A display device for deriving and displaying a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) that can be displayed;
The second determination result (a state in which any special combination is won) that is more advantageous for the player than the first determination result (a state in which no special combination is selected) ) With a specific effect execution means (execution control of a continuous effect by the CPU 91a) for executing a specific effect (continuous effect) to notify the possibility of
The derivation control means includes
In the situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, an instruction is given to cause the variable display area to derive display results for the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Display result derived for the number of steps of the stepping motor (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) at the time when the stop operation position is stored in the workpiece of the reel that is changing A control pattern corresponding to the determination result (internal lottery result) of the pre-determining means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns (reel stop control by the stop control table) that uniquely specify (stop position). Control pattern selection means (at the start of reel rotation, the data creation table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is uniquely selected, and the selected data Includes a processing) to create a stop control table for all of the reels from the table for forming,
When it is instructed by the derivation instructing means to derive the display result in the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived (when the stop operation position is stored in the changing reel work), the control pattern In the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the selection means, the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the instruction to be derived by the derivation instruction means is given as the display result of the variable display area Control to derive (control to stop the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table),
The control pattern selection means is when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result (when no special role is won) and when the determination result is the second determination result (any) A special display result (the “replay watermelon bell” of the second to fourth symbols constituting the chance eye, 8 10th symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, 15th to 17th symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”) is specified. A specific control pattern selection means for selecting a reel stop control by a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn at which the display result to be configured becomes a stop position is determined;
The specific effect executing means is
When a combination of display results of the plurality of variable display areas becomes a specific combination (chance) including the specific display result, first specific effect execution means (chance eye is derived) that executes the specific effect Process to execute a continuous production when
Specific production determining means (continuous production lottery) for determining whether to execute the specific production;
When the specific effect determining means determines to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is executed regardless of whether or not the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas is the specific combination. 2 specific effect execution means (a process of executing a continuous effect when winning a continuous effect),
including,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in a situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, a variable display area for which display results have not yet been derived has been instructed to be derived by the derivation instruction means. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number of steps of the stepping motor, and is displayed in the corresponding variable display area. Control is performed to derive the result. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to the determination result of one pre-determining unit, and it is not necessary to further select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns.
Further, the specific effect is executed when the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas becomes a specific combination including the specific display result. That is, since the specific effect is executed in relation to the derivation of the specific display result that may be the second determination result, the determination result of the predetermining means is related to the display result of the variable display device and the display result. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result by both effects.
In addition, when the control for deriving the display result based on the control pattern uniquely selected corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means is performed, the ratio of deriving the specific display result is extremely reduced. However, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination means, the specific effect is executed regardless of whether or not the specific effect including the specific display result is obtained. Even if the ratio at which the specific display result is derived is extremely reduced, the specific effect is appropriately executed, so that the determination result of the predetermining means is more advantageous for the player than the first determination result. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation of being a result.
The specific control pattern selection means selects a specific control pattern only for any one variable display area, selects a specific control pattern for any two or more variable display areas, and displays all variable displays. A specific control pattern may be selected for the region.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 6 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
The variable display device fluctuates by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A display device for deriving and displaying a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) that can be displayed;
The second determination result (a state in which any special combination is won) that is more advantageous for the player than the first determination result (a state in which no special combination is selected) ) With a specific effect execution means (execution control of a continuous effect by the CPU 91a) for executing a specific effect (continuous effect) to notify the possibility of
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs that the display result is derived in the variable display area (when the stop operation position is stored in the workpiece of the reel being changed) From a plurality of control patterns (reel stop control by the stop control table) that uniquely specify the display result (stop position) derived for (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) The determination result of the article predetermination means (internal lottery result) and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived (stop position of the stopped reel) Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting the corresponding control pattern (when one of the reels stops, the data creation table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely selected. And a process for creating a stop control table corresponding to the changing reel from the selected data creation table)
When it is instructed by the derivation instructing means to derive the display result in the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived (when the stop operation position is stored in the changing reel work), the control pattern In the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the selection means, the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the instruction to be derived by the derivation instruction means is given as the display result of the variable display area Control to derive (control to stop the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table),
The control pattern selection means is when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result (when no special role is won) and when the determination result is the second determination result (any) A special display result (the “replay watermelon bell” of the second to fourth symbols constituting the chance eye, 8 10th symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, 15th to 17th symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”) is specified. A specific control pattern selection means for selecting a reel stop control by a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn at which the display result to be configured becomes a stop position is determined;
The specific effect executing means is
When a combination of display results of the plurality of variable display areas becomes a specific combination (chance) including the specific display result, first specific effect execution means (chance eye is derived) that executes the specific effect Process to execute a continuous production when
Specific production determining means (continuous production lottery) for determining whether to execute the specific production;
When the specific effect determining means determines to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is executed regardless of whether or not the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas is the specific combination. 2 specific effect execution means (a process of executing a continuous effect when winning a continuous effect),
including,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result is still Predetermined from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number of stepping motor steps at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs that the variable display area for which no is derived A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control is performed to derive the display result in the corresponding variable display area. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns There is no need to select further.
Further, the specific effect is executed when the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas becomes a specific combination including the specific display result. That is, since the specific effect is executed in relation to the derivation of the specific display result that may be the second determination result, the determination result of the predetermining means is related to the display result of the variable display device and the display result. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result by both effects.
Further, in the case where control is performed to derive the display result based on the control result uniquely selected corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived, In some cases, the rate at which a specific display result is derived may be drastically reduced. However, if execution of a specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination means, has a specific combination including a specific display result been achieved? Regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed, the specific effect is appropriately executed even when the ratio at which the specific display result is derived is extremely reduced. It is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation that the second determination result is more advantageous to the player than the determination result.
The specific control pattern selection means selects the specific control pattern only for any one of the variable display areas from which the display result has not yet been derived, or the variable from which the display result has not yet been derived. A specific control pattern may be selected for any two or more variable display areas of the display area, or a specific control pattern may be selected for all variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Is to select a specific control pattern for a variable display area for which display results have not yet been derived, provided that the display results for the variable display areas for which display results have already been derived have been derived in a specific order. May be.
Further, in claims 3 and 5, to uniquely select a control pattern corresponding to a determination result of the prior determination unit means that the same control pattern is always selected when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same. This does not preclude the selection of a common control pattern when the determination results of the prior determination means are different.
In addition, in claim 4 or 6, to uniquely select a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is determined by the determination of the prior determination means When the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is the same, the same control pattern should always be selected. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the display results of the variable display areas from which the results are derived are different.
The specific display result in claims 4 and 6 may be a display result derived to any one of the variable display areas, or a display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived. It may be a display result that a specific combination is constituted by the combination.
Further, in claim 5 or 6, the specific combination including the specific display result may be a combination of display results including the specific display result for any one of the variable display areas, or any two of them. A combination of display results including specific display results for the variable display areas described above may be used, or a combination of display results including specific display results for all variable display areas may be used.
Further, in claims 5 and 6, the first specific effect executing means, when the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas becomes a specific combination including the specific display result, However, the specific effect may be executed when the specific display result is derived. Even in this case, the specific combination is derived as a trigger. Production is performed. That is, since the specific effect is executed in relation to the derivation of the specific display result that may be the second determination result, the determination result of the predetermining means is related to the display result of the variable display device and the display result. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result by both effects.
Control for uniquely identifying a display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs to derive a display result in the variable display area. A pattern is a control pattern in which the same display result is always specified as the derived display result when the number of steps at the time when the display instruction is directed to the variable display area by the derivation instruction means is the same. For example, the number of individual steps, or a step number unit that is continuous within a certain range (for example, the number of steps required for one symbol to change), or an identification code that can identify the step number unit (for example, The variable display area is determined by the derivation instructing means from the variation amount table in which the variation amount until the display result is derived for each symbol number). A control pattern that uniquely identifies a display result derived with respect to the number of steps at the time when it is instructed to derive the display result, the number of individual steps, or the number of steps that are consecutive within a certain range, or the step The number of steps at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs the variable display area to derive the display result from the priority table in which the priority of the derived display result is determined for each identification code capable of identifying several units. For example, a control pattern for uniquely specifying a display result derived from the above is applicable. Further, from the number of steps at the time when it is instructed to derive the display result in the variable display area by the derivation instructing means, the pull-in control is performed so that the display result to be drawn is maximized within a predetermined pull-in range, In order to prevent the display result from derivation being prohibited, in the case of kicking control that pulls in the display result other than the display result for which derivation is prohibited, an instruction is given that the display result is derived to the variable display area by the derivation instruction means. If the display result derived from the number of steps at the time point is uniquely specified, it corresponds to the control pattern of the present invention.
Moreover, in Claims 3 and 4, the second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified from the number of steps larger than the first specific control pattern among the number of steps is based on a variation amount table. If it is a control pattern, a variation amount table in which a variation amount resulting in a specific display result for a larger number of steps, a step number unit, and an identification code than the variation amount table applied in the first specific control pattern is defined. Is a control pattern to which the priority table is applied, and a priority table in which the priority of a specific display result is set to be relatively higher than the priority table applied in the first specific control pattern is If it is a control pattern to be applied and is a control pattern by pull-in control and kick-off control, the first specific control pattern is selected. Kiyori also control pattern for performing pull-in control to draw specific display results in a wide pull-in range.
In addition, the second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result in claims 3 to 6 is a determination result that can be expected to acquire more game balls than the first determination result. For example, the first determination result corresponds to a result indicating that the occurrence of a special prize accompanying a transition to a gaming state in which a large number of game balls can be expected is not permitted, and the second determination result Corresponds to a result indicating that the above-described special winning is permitted. In addition, as a first determination result, a result indicating that the occurrence of a first special prize accompanying a transition to a gaming state in which a first amount of gaming balls can be expected is permitted is applied. As a result of the determination, a result indicating that the occurrence of a second special prize accompanying a transition to a gaming state in which a second amount of game balls larger than the first amount can be expected is permitted is applied. May be.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 7 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
A data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), among a plurality of types of allowable stages (setting values) having different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining whether or not winning is permitted is determined. From an allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting any of the allowable stages,
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
With
The pre-determining unit reads data indicating a permissible stage stored in the permissible stage storage area (a set value stored in a set value work), and at a ratio according to the permissible stage indicated by the read data. It is determined whether or not the generation of a winning is permitted (the CPU 41a reads a set value in the internal lottery and determines whether or not a plurality of types of winnings are won according to the winning probability of the read set value). With
The slot machine using the game ball further includes:
Stored data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal (determination of RAM parity and determination of destruction diagnosis data by the CPU 41a);
Disabling means (error processing by the CPU 41a) for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determining means determines that the data stored in the data storing means is not normal;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means (newly set by setting change processing) On the condition that the value has been selected and set), the disabling cancellation means (transition to the game processing by the CPU 41a) that cancels the disabled state of the game and enables the progress of the game,
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, the progress of the game is disabled, and an allowable stage (set value) is newly set based on the operation of the setting operation means. If the game is not selected or set, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, it is selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means, not the allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine using the game ball. Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the permissible stage (generally, the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an amusement shop employee, which is the permissible stage selected by the amusement shop side) Fairness can be achieved.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 8 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
A data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), among a plurality of types of allowable stages (setting values) having different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining whether or not winning is permitted is determined. From an allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting any of the allowable stages,
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
With
The pre-determining unit reads data indicating a permissible stage stored in the permissible stage storage area (a set value stored in a set value work), and at a ratio according to the permissible stage indicated by the read data. It is determined whether or not the generation of a winning is permitted (the CPU 41a reads a set value in the internal lottery and determines whether or not a plurality of types of winnings are won according to the winning probability of the read set value). With
The slot machine using the game ball further includes:
Permissible stage data judging means for judging whether or not the data indicating the permissible stage stored in the permissible stage storage area for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible stage that can be selected by the permissible stage selecting means ( CPU 41a determines whether or not the set value read from the set value work is a value in the range of 1 to 6),
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the data indicating the allowable level stored in the allowable level storage area is not appropriate data by the allowable level data determining means (the CPU 41a is set When it is determined that the set value read from the value work is not in the range of 1 to 6, control is made to a RAM abnormal error state),
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. The disabling canceling means for canceling the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed (when the CPU 41a shifts to the RAM abnormal error state, the setting value is newly selected and set by the setting change process so that the game is Return to processing)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is determined for each game whether or not the data indicating the allowable level that determines the rate at which the winning is allowed is appropriate, and if it is determined that the data indicating the allowable level is not appropriate. Game progress is disabled. That is, if the data indicating the allowable level is not appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selection means, the progress of the game is disabled. The state in which the progress of the game is disabled is canceled by newly selecting and setting an allowable stage (setting value) based on the operation of the setting operation means. For this reason, if the data indicating the allowable stage is not appropriate due to garbled data, etc., the selection / setting is based on the operation of the setting operation means, not the allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine using the game ball. Since the game is played based on the permitted stage (generally, the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the game store, and is therefore the allowable stage selected by the game store side) Fairness can be achieved.
It should be noted that the permissible stage data determining means is configured to allow the permissible level at least once at any timing of one game (for example, at the start or end of the game, at the time of executing a process that is always executed for each game) What is necessary is just to determine whether or not the data indicating the allowable level stored in the level storage area is appropriate data indicating the allowable level selectable by the allowable level selection means.
In the invention according to claim 8, the permissible stage data determining means is an appropriateness indicating that the permissible stage data stored in the permissible stage storage area for each game is selectable by the permissible stage selection means. However, when the permissible stage data determination means satisfies a predetermined condition instead of every game (for example, a special game state advantageous to the player every predetermined number of games). It may be determined whether the data indicating the allowable level stored in the allowable level storage area is appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selection means. Even in this case, the same effect as that of the invention of claim 8 can be obtained.

Further, in claims 1 to 8, the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or a maximum bet number. You may make it become. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
In addition, the predetermined timing start condition for the timing means to start timing in claims 1 to 8 may be a condition that is satisfied after the start of the game. For example, when a game start operation is performed, the variable display area When the change operation starts, the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective after the start of the change of the variable display area, the operation of the stop operation means invalidated by the stop operation becomes effective again, and finally For example, when the stop operation means is operated.
Further, in the first to eighth aspects, the automatic derivation control means is instructed only once by the derivation instruction means to derive the display result in the variable display area when there are a plurality of variable display areas in change. Thus, it is possible to perform control for sequentially deriving the display result to the variable display area that is changing, and that the display result is derived from the deriving instruction means to the variable display area for each variable display area that is changing. May be instructed sequentially, and each time an instruction is received, control for deriving a display result in the corresponding variable display area may be performed.
The automatic derivation control means according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the derivation instructing means is instructed to derive a display result in the variable display area because the predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed. The control is performed to derive the display result in the variable display area that is still changing so that the combination of the display results becomes a combination that does not constitute a prize when all the variable display areas are derived. The display result has already been derived in the variable display area by operating the derivation operation means before the determined automatic stop time has elapsed, and a winning (for example, any one of them is determined by the already derived display result). This is not the case when a winning is established based on the display results of the two variable display areas.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 9 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
When the display results are derived for all the variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel), the combination of symbols stopped on each of the plurality of pay lines (L1 to L5) across all the variable display areas A winning determination means (a winning determination process by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not a prize is received according to
The operation time derivation control means (reel stop control based on a stop operation) and the automatic derivation control means (reel stop control based on the elapse of automatic stop time),
Variable in a specific order (stop order in which the left reel is the first stop) in the game in which it is determined that the specific winning (bell, replay) is allowed to occur by the pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a). When the display result is derived in the display area, except for the final variable display area (final stop reel), a combination of symbols corresponding to the specific winning line is also provided on any winning line of the plurality of winning lines. Display results in the variable display area based on the first control pattern to be obtained (reel stop control by a stop control table in which a combination of “bell” and “replay” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5) And when the display results are derived in the variable display area in an order other than the specific order, the plurality of winning prizes are excluded except for the final variable display area. A second control pattern (a winning line in the case of a bell) in which a combination of symbols corresponding to the specific winning can be arranged only on a specific winning line (L1 in the case of a bell, L2 or L5 in the case of a replay). Reel stop control by a stop control table with a combination of “bells” only in L1, and in the case of replay, a reel stop control by a stop control table with a combination of “replays” only in a winning line L2 or L5) Perform control to derive the display result in the display area,
The derivation instructing means determines a predetermined number other than the specific order when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed in a state where at least two or more variable display areas are still changing after the time measuring means starts timing. Instructing that the display result is derived in the variable display area (when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the reel starts rotating, an automatic stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, and the right, middle, and left orders are set. , Store the stop operation position in the workpiece of the reel that is changing)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the automatic stop is performed, it is instructed to derive the display results in an order different from the specific order. Therefore, when the automatic stop is performed in a state where a specific winning is permitted. , Except for the final variable display area, the combination of symbols corresponding to the permitted specific winning line is controlled so that only a specific winning line among a plurality of winning lines is aligned, so that the specific winning is permitted When the automatic stop is performed in the state, the symbol corresponding to the specific winning is stopped on the specific winning line in the variable display area other than the final variable display area, and the specific winning is displayed in the final variable display area. The display mode is such that the symbols corresponding to the specific winning are not arranged on the specific winning line where the symbol to be stopped is stopped. As a result, even if an automatic stop is performed in a state where a specific winning is permitted, whether or not it is derived from the display mode in accordance with the automatic stop in a state where the specific winning is permitted It becomes possible to discriminate.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 10 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) generates a prize including a special prize (cherry) that is established only by deriving a special display result in any one specific variable display area (left reel). Decide whether to allow,
The derivation instructing means is configured such that when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses in a state where at least two variable display areas including at least the specific variable display area are still changing after the time measuring means starts timing, Instructs the variable display area to derive the display result in a predetermined order with the specific variable display area as the last (when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the reel starts rotating, the automatic stop flag is displayed in the RAM 41c. To store the stop operation position on the reel work changing in the order of right, middle, left)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the automatic stop is performed in a state where a special winning that is established only by deriving a special display result in any one of the specific variable display areas is performed, the final variable display area is displayed. Even if the control patterns of the variable display areas other than the above are shared, the combination corresponding to the special prize can be removed.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 11 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
Derivation for invalidating the operation of the derivation operation means during a period from when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measurement means has started to measure until display results are derived in at least all variable display areas. Comprising operation invalidation means (processing for invalidating detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R after setting the automatic stop flag in the RAM 41c);
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated during the period from when the automatic stop is started until the display results are derived to at least all the variable display areas, the derived display results It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by whether the player is caused by a stop operation by the player or by an automatic stop.

A slot machine using a game ball according to claim 12 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The operation time derivation control means (reel stop control based on the stop operation) is performed when it is determined by the predetermination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) that a special winning advantageous to the player is permitted (whichever When the special combination is won), the display mode is different from the combination of the display results corresponding to the special prize, and it is determined by the pre-determining means that the special prize is allowed to occur. A control pattern (a display of the left reel) that is a combination that is not derived when there is not, and that is capable of deriving a predetermined combination (reach eyes) indicating that the occurrence of the special prize is determined to be permitted As a result, "Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7" of the 16th to 18th designs, and "Replay Watermelon Bell" of the 20, 21, 1st designs or the 12th to 14th designs. Based on the stop control of the reel by the stop control table for stopping the display mode in which none of the winnings are aligned on the winning line, and stopping the display mode in which no winning is aligned on the winning line) While performing control to derive the display result to the variable display area (left reel, middle reel, right reel),
In the slot machine using the game ball, when a display result is derived in the variable display area by the automatic derivation control means (reel stop control based on the elapse of automatic stop time) (of the reel stop command indicating automatic stop) (When receiving a reel stop command for the last reel to stop), it has been determined that the special winning is allowed even if the combination of the display results of the variable display area is a predetermined combination. Display result invalid notifying means (by CPU 91a) notifying (notifying that the chance eyes and reach eyes are invalid even if the reach eyes and chance eyes are stopped because the reel is stopped by automatic stop control) Production control based on notification pattern at the time of automatic stop)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if a predetermined combination (so-called reach eye) is accidentally derived by automatic stop, it is notified that the combination is invalid. Can prevent misunderstanding.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 13 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
Before the display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas, it is determined by the predetermining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) that it is determined that any one of the winnings is allowed (small role notification) Winning allowance notification means (effect control by the CPU 91a) for notifying the effect),
When the display result is derived in the variable display area (left reel, middle reel, right reel) by the automatic derivation control means (reel stop control based on the passage of automatic stop time) (of the reel stop command indicating automatic stop) When receiving a reel stop command for the last reel to be stopped), the winning allowance notification invalid notifying means (CPU 91a) for notifying that the notification by the winning allowance notifying means is invalid (that the small role notification effect is invalid). Production control based on the automatic stop notification pattern by),
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the winning allowance notification is performed, it is notified that the winning allowance notification is invalid even if the notified winning is not generated due to the automatic stop. It is possible to prevent misunderstandings.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a base frame 1a (see FIG. 2) fixed to a game island. A main body frame 1b (see FIG. 2) pivotally supported on the side end of the base frame 1a, and a front door 1c pivotally supported on the side end of the main body frame 1b. It is configured.

  Inside the main body frame 1b of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, the three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1c. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 8, on the outer periphery of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually identifiable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko ball used for the game and an upper plate 26 for storing (waiting for) the pachinko ball paid out from the payout device 200 are located below the fluoroscopic window 3 in the front door 1c. The provided operation console 4 is formed so as to bulge forward, and below that is a lower plate 25 for storing pachinko balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 and pachinko balls returned from the upper plate 26. Is provided. An outlet 25a for taking out pachinko balls stored in the lower dish 25 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower dish 25, and the outlet is removed by a sliding operation of a lever 25b provided at the front portion of the lower dish 25. By opening the shutter 25c that closes the 25a, the pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 flow out to a ball box (not shown) disposed below the lower plate 25, and the pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 are removed. It can be easily taken out.

  Further, on the upper surface of the operation table 4, a one-ball take-in switch 5 that is operated when instructing to take one pachinko ball from the upper plate 26 and a prescribed number determined according to the gaming state from the upper plate 26. MAXBET switch 6 operated to instruct to take in the number of pachinko balls required to set the number of bets (3 in the normal gaming state described later in this embodiment, 1 in the regular bonus described later) It is operated when the collected balls are settled and returned to the upper plate 26, or when pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 and pachinko balls in the capture device 100 described later are returned to the lower plate 25. A settlement switch 10, a start switch 7 operated when starting a game, a balance indicator 28 for displaying a balance of valuable value read from a prepaid card being accepted on a card unit 400 arranged in parallel, Operated when returning the prepaid card being accepted to the card unit 400 arranged side by side, the ball lending switch 29 operated when lending the pachinko ball in the range of the remaining value of the value displayed on the amount indicator 28 The return switches 30 are arranged, and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged on the front surface of the operation table 4. Has been.

  Further, the MAXBET switch 6 has a built-in BET switch effective LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the pachinko ball taking-in operation by the operation of the one-ball taking-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R have left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. 4) is built in each.

  In addition, between the see-through window 3 and the operation table 4 in the front door 1c, the number of used balls used for setting the number of bets taken in by operating the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 was taken in. However, since it is less than the required unit number of balls (5 balls in this embodiment) when setting the minimum unit bet number, it is the sum of the number of unused balls that have not yet been used for setting the bet number. The number of balls already paid out and the number of balls already paid out of the number of winning balls associated with the occurrence of winnings are displayed. And a game auxiliary indicator 12 that displays an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, 1 BET LED 14 that lights up that 1 bet is set, and lights up that 2 bets are set 2BETLED15, 3 bets set 3BETLED 16 that informs that it is being lit, capture request LED 17 that informs that a pachinko ball can be taken in is lit, and that the start operation of the game by operating the start switch 7 is valid A start valid LED 18, a wait LED 19 that lights up to indicate that a wait is in progress (a state in which a reel rotation has not started since a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the previous game), and a replay game to be described later A replaying LED 20 is provided to notify the effect by lighting.

  In addition, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 are returned to the lower plate 25 through the ball removal passage 120 without passing through the take-in device 100 described later at the upper position of the operation table 4 in the front door 1c. A ball removal lever 31 is provided which is operated when the operation is performed.

  The upper plate 26 opened on the upper surface of the operation table 4 and having an open upper surface is composed of a storage portion that is formed wider in the front-rear direction, and a strip-shaped rectification portion that has a shorter front-rear width than the storage portion. The pachinko balls thrown into the storage part are divided into three strips by two rectifying plates facing the left-right direction installed on the rectifying unit, although not shown in detail, and are taken into the preparation preparation ball passage 110. It flows in and is supplied to the capture device 100.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 are divided into three strips by the rectifying unit and supplied to the capture device 100, so that the pachinko balls from the upper plate 26 to the capture device 100 are supplied. It is possible to improve the supply speed, and thereby the pachinko ball uptake speed by the uptake apparatus 100 can also be improved. In this embodiment, it is constituted by three straightening passages, but it may be two or four or more passages.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the downstream part of the rectifying part, that is, the connecting part with the take-in preparation ball passage 110 for guiding and supplying the pachinko ball flowing in from the upper plate 26 to the take-in device 100 is provided. In addition, an outflow port 121 for allowing the pachinko ball flowing down the rectifying unit to flow out into the ball passage 120 is formed. The outlet 121 is opened and closed by an open / close shutter 122 provided to open and close in conjunction with the sliding operation of the ball removal lever 31, and by opening the open / close shutter 122, The pachinko balls flow down from the outlet 121 in the ball removal passage 120, join a return ball guide passage 109 described later, are discharged from the discharge outlet 9, and are returned to the lower plate 25. That is, by opening and closing the opening / closing shutter 122 by operating the ball removal lever 31, the ball connected to the take-up preparation ball passage 110 side that communicates the pachinko ball flow path of the upper plate 26 to the take-in device 100 or the lower plate 25. The pachinko ball of the upper plate 26 is returned to the lower plate 25 without passing through the take-in device 100 by switching to either the extraction passage 120 or the return ball guiding passage 109 side and opening the opening / closing shutter 122. The

  The upper plate 26 is formed in a dish shape whose upper surface is open, so that the stored pachinko balls can be taken out from above by hand, and the pachinko that has flowed down into the operation table 4. The sphere flows down in the take-in preparation sphere passage 110 arranged inside the operation table 4 and is guided to an after-mentioned taking-in device 100 which is also arranged inside the operation table 4. That is, the pachinko ball that has flowed into the take-in preparation sphere passage 110, except for the remaining sphere transparent window 130 (see FIG. 3) formed between the remaining amount indicator 28 and the start switch 7 on the upper surface of the operation table 4, The structure is invisible from the outside and cannot be taken out by hand.

  Inside the front door 1c, a set value display 24 (see FIG. 4) for displaying a set value at that time is provided while changing a set value and confirming the set value, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 1, a take-in device 100 for taking the pachinko balls supplied from the upper plate 26 is provided inside the operation table 4.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the take-in device 100, three sprockets 106 for ball cutting are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction corresponding to the respective strips of the take-in preparation ball passage 110 (in FIG. 3, Only the front sprocket is visible.) Two notches are formed on the outer periphery of the sprocket 106, and when the sprocket 106 is rotated by driving the take-in motor 101, pachinko balls that have entered the notch are discharged downward one by one. It has become. Further, the notches of the sprockets 106 corresponding to the respective strips are arranged so that the arrangement positions in the circumferential direction are different from each other (six notches of the three sprockets 106 are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees), As the three sprockets 106 rotate synchronously, pachinko balls are discharged for each sprocket 106.

  The pachinko balls supplied to the sprocket 106 from the two take-up preparation ball passages 110 out of the three take-up preparation ball passages 110 are discharged from the two sprockets 106 and then merged downstream. Then, it flows down into a take-in ball guide passage 108 or a return ball guide passage 109 described later.

  In the present embodiment, the case preparation members constituting the external shape of the preparation preparation sphere passage 110 and the acquisition device 100 are all formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. The pachinko sphere flowing down in the apparatus 100 is configured to be visible from the outside through the remaining sphere transparent window 130 formed on the upper surface of the operation table 4.

  Below the sprocket 106, it swings when the sorting solenoid 102 is excited or released, and the flow path of the pachinko sphere discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is either the take-in ball guide passage 108 or the return ball guide passage 109. A flow path switching valve 107 for switching to one side is provided.

  The flow path switching valve 107 is composed of two flow path switching valves 107 arranged in each of the two passages on the upstream side of the intake ball guiding path 108 and the return ball guiding path 109. The lower end of the flow path switching valve 107 is connected to the lower end of the link member 124 whose center is pivotally supported at the tip of the telescopic shaft 102a of the sorting solenoid 102, and is a swing shaft that extends in the horizontal direction over the two passages. 107a is fixed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the expansion and contraction shaft 102a expands and contracts by excitation or release of the sorting solenoid 102, so that the link member 124 rotates about the shaft portion and rotates the swing shaft 107a around the axis. Therefore, the flow path switching valve 107 swings around the swing shaft 107a. Further, since the telescopic shaft 102a of the sorting solenoid 102 is always urged in the extending direction by a coil spring (not shown) that is mounted around the telescopic shaft 102a in an unexcited state, the distal end of the telescopic shaft 102a. The flow path switching valve 107 connected to each other via the link member 124 is configured to remove the flow path of the pachinko balls taken in by the sprocket 106 when the sorting solenoid 102 is not excited (off state). It is always urged toward a position (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3) on the side of the ball guide passage 108.

  Further, the upper end of the link member 124 is when the pachinko ball flow path is switched to the return ball guiding passage 109, that is, when the flow path switching valve 107 is in the standing position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It is detected by a flow path detection switch 115 provided near the main body of the sorting solenoid 102. In this way, depending on the detection status of the link member 124 by the flow path detection switch 115, the flow path switching valve 107 determines whether the flow path of the pachinko sphere is on the intake ball guide path 108 side or the return ball guide path 109 side. That is, the actual flow path direction of the pachinko ball by the flow path switching valve 107 can be detected.

  An intake ball detection switch 105 is disposed below the flow path switching valve 107 and connected to the intake ball guiding passage 108, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106. Pachinko balls distributed to the incoming ball guide passage 108 are detected. On the other hand, a return ball detection switch 103 is arranged at a connection portion with the return ball guide passage 109, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 and is assigned to the return ball guide passage 109 side by the flow path switching valve 107. A sphere is detected.

  Next, when the take-in device 100 takes the pachinko ball guided from the upper plate 26 in order to set the bet number and discharges it to the game island without returning it to the player, the distribution solenoid 102 is excited. The state is stopped. In this state, since the flow path switching valve 107 is at the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 3, the pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is guided to the intake ball guide passage 108 side, and the intake ball detection switch 105 Is detected, and then flows down the take-in ball guiding passage 108 to the rear side of the slot machine 1 and is collected in an out ball tank inside the game island (not shown).

  When the pachinko ball on the upper plate 26 is discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25, the sorting solenoid 102 is in an excited state. In this state, the flow path switching valve 107 swings against the urging force of the coil spring to a position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 3, and the pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is returned to the return ball guiding path 109. Then, after being detected by the return ball detection switch 103, it flows down the return ball guide passage 109 and is discharged from the payout port 9 to the lower plate 25 and returned to the player. . The sorting solenoid 102 is in a state where excitation is stopped except when the pachinko ball of the upper plate 26 is discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25. That is, except for the case where the pachinko balls on the upper plate 26 are discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25, the flow path switching valve 107 is at the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 3 and the flow of the pachinko balls discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 The road direction is on the side of the take-in ball guide passage 108.

  Further, a return ball clogging detection switch 111 (see FIGS. 1 and 4) for detecting clogging of the ball in the passage is provided at a position in the vicinity of the lower plate 25 in the return ball guiding passage 109. For example, the lower plate 25 Since the tank is full, it can be detected that the return ball guiding passage 109 is clogged with a ball.

  The lower part of the above-described take-in device 100, take-in preparation ball passage 110, ball removal passage 120, take-in ball guide passage 108, return ball guide passage 109, and payout ball guide passage 208 is the operation table 4 and the operation table. 4 is covered with a cover panel 4a (see FIG. 1) that forms a lower front surface, and in particular, a pachinko ball that has flowed into the take-in preparation ball passage 110 and the take-in device 100 cannot be taken out. In the vicinity of the upper position of the take-in device 100 on the upper surface of the operation table 4, the pachinko balls remaining in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 (in the take-in device 100), specifically, the ball removal lever 31 are operated. Even after the pachinko balls on the upper plate 26 are removed through the ball removal passage 120, the pachinko balls remain in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 and enter the inside of the cover panel 4a so that they can no longer be seen. A remaining spherical see-through window 130 is formed as a light-transmitting portion made of a transparent panel.

  As described above, since the take-up preparation ball passage 110 and the case cover of the take-in device 100 are formed of a transparent resin material, the player passes through the remaining ball see-through window 130 in the take-up preparation ball passage 110 ( Whether or not the pachinko balls remain in the capture device 100) can be visually confirmed from the outside of the slot machine 1. Therefore, the player can surely recognize when the pachinko ball remains in the capture preparation ball passage 110, so that the pachinko ball remains in the capture preparation ball passage 110. Regardless, it is possible to avoid the player from being disadvantaged by ending the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, in the main body frame 1b, a pachinko ball supplied from a game island or the like on which the slot machine 1 is installed is disposed above the upper plate 26 to the upper plate 26. Is provided. The pachinko balls paid out from the payout device 200 flow down the payout ball guide passage 208 extending downward from the payout device 200, and a communication port formed on the storage portion 26 a side in the upper plate 26. 13 is paid out to the upper plate 26. Further, the payout ball guide passage 208 is extended from the communication port 13 toward the lower plate 25 below, and surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 because the upper plate 26 is full are discharged ball guide passages 208. Is discharged from the discharge outlet 9 to the lower plate 25.

  The main body frame 1b faces the see-through window 3 of the front door 1c so that the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reels 2L, 2C and 2R described above are provided. A reel unit (not shown) comprising reel sensors 33 (see FIG. 4) each capable of detecting a reference position is provided, and a switch panel (not shown) facing the front door 1c is provided below the reel unit. Is provided. This switch panel includes a stop switch 36 for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. (Refer to FIG. 4), functioning as a setting key switch 37 (see FIG. 4) for switching to the setting change mode at startup, and as a reset switch for releasing the error state and the stop state except for the RAM abnormal error in the normal state. In the setting change mode, a reset / setting switch 38 (see FIG. 4) that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (payout rate) of internal lottery described later is provided. By opening the front door 1c, the stop switch 36, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 disposed on the switch panel can be operated from the front of the slot machine 1.

  A power supply unit (not shown) that houses a power supply board 75 to be described later is provided behind the switch panel, and a power switch 39 (shown in FIG. 4), and by opening the body frame 1b, the power switch 39 provided on the side surface of the power supply unit can be operated.

  The main body frame 1b includes a game control board 40 for controlling the game, a payout control board 60 for controlling the payout of pachinko balls, an effect control board 90 for controlling the effects, and driving of the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. A power supply board 75 that generates power and supplies the power to each unit is provided.

  Among these boards, the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed in one housing case 150 formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side. The effect control board 90 is disposed on the front door 1c side of the main body frame 1b, and the power board 75 is disposed between the housing case 150 and the switch panel described above while being housed in the power unit described above. Has been.

  The housing case 150 in which the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed is composed of a case body that can house the board and a case cover that can open and close the opening of the case body, although not particularly shown. A plurality of sealing pieces into which one-way screws (screws that can be rotated only in one direction by a screwdriver) are screwed are provided on the left and right sides of the case body and the case cover.

  The storage case 150 configured in this manner is configured such that, for example, one of the left and right sealing pieces of the case main body and the case cover is screwed into only one sealing piece on each of the left and right sides, and the tip of the one way screw is Further, by screwing into a mounting hole (not shown) formed on the back surface of the slot machine 1, the case cover is opened and the housing case 150 is opened unless the mounting-related portion related to the mounting of the sealing piece or the like is destroyed. So that the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are improperly modified or replaced with an illegal board. .

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko balls supplied to the slot machine 1 are stored in a supply tank 204 provided at the upper back of the main body frame 1b, and are passed through a ball supply passage 210 extending from the supply tank. It flows down and is supplied to the dispensing device 200. The ball supply passage 210 includes three passages (not shown), and the pachinko balls flowing out from the replenishing tank 204 are supplied to the dispensing device 200 in a state of being divided into the three passages. . A supply ball detection switch 205 is provided at a predetermined height position above the payout device 200 in the ball supply passage 210 in correspondence with each line, and the pachinko supplied to the payout device 200 by the supply ball detection switch 205. Whether or not the ball is waiting is detected. In the present embodiment, the supply ball detection switch 205 is a position where it is possible to detect that 75 balls, which is the maximum number of winning balls to be paid out by the payout device 200 when a winning is accompanied by paying out a prize ball, is supplied. The pachinko ball required for paying out the maximum number of winning balls is detected. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of balls taken in by the take-in device 100 is 15, and a maximum of 15 pachinko balls are paid out by the pay-out device 200 based on the operation of the checkout switch 10. The supply ball detection switch 205 detects whether or not a pachinko ball necessary for paying out the number of balls to be paid out is waiting based on the checkout switch 10. Furthermore, in this embodiment, lending of 25 balls is requested by a single lending request from the card unit 400. Even in this case, the supply ball detection switch 205 pays out the number of balls to be paid out based on the lending request. It is detected whether or not the pachinko balls necessary for the waiting are waiting.

  The payout device 200 is configured in substantially the same manner as the take-in device 100, although not particularly shown in detail, and is driven by a payout motor 201 (see FIG. 4) corresponding to each item of the ball supply passage 210. A rotating sprocket (not shown) is provided. Also, below the sprocket, a payout ball detection switch 202 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the passage of a pachinko ball discharged by the sprocket based on the payout of a prize ball or the like is provided. After the discharged pachinko ball is detected by the payout ball detection switch 202, it is discharged into the payout ball guide passage 208 extending from the lower part of the payout device 200.

  The payout ball guide passage 208 extends to the lower plate 25, and the pachinko balls discharged from the payout device 200 flow down the payout ball guide passage 208 and are discharged from the communication port 27 to the upper plate 26. The surplus sphere overflowing from 26 is paid out to the lower plate 25 from the payout opening 9. In addition, a payout ball clogging detection switch 112 (see FIGS. 1 and 4) for detecting a ball clogging in the passage is provided at a position in the vicinity of the lower plate 25 in the payout ball guiding passage 208. For example, the lower plate 25 Because of the full tank, it is possible to detect whether or not the payout ball guide passage 208 is clogged with a ball.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided in parallel with a card unit 400 that accepts a prepaid card in which a valuable value is recorded. From the card unit 400 based on the operation of the above-described ball rental switch 29, In response to this request, it is possible to lend a pachinko ball using the valuable value recorded on the prepaid card being accepted.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a bet number is set using the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26. As the bet number, only a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state can be set. In this embodiment, 3 is set as the specified number of bets in the normal gaming state to be described later. In the regular bonus, which will be described later, 1 is set. Therefore, when the gaming state is the regular bonus, only one bet can be set, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, only three bets are placed. The number can be set. In this embodiment, five pachinko balls are required to set the minimum unit bet number of 1, and one bet is set every time five pachinko balls are captured. .

  In order to set the bet number, the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. In this embodiment, when one ball take-in switch 5 is operated, one pachinko ball is taken in from the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26, and when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, it is stored in the upper plate 26. The number of pachinko balls necessary to set a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state at that time is taken in from the pachinko balls.

  In addition, the pachinko balls taken in by the take-in device 100 in order to set the bet number in accordance with the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 in this way are set in the take-in ball guide passage 108 as described above. It flows down, is taken into the inside of the slot machine 1, that is, the back side as seen from the side facing the player in the slot machine 1, and is discharged to the out ball tank provided inside the game island (not shown) as described above. The

  When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, the game can be started when a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set. For example, a range of the predetermined number determined according to the gaming state. It is also possible to set the bet number within the range, and at the time when at least one bet number is set, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated at a constant speed, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated in this state, the corresponding operation is performed. The rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of pachinko balls (principal balls) are paid out from the payout device 200 according to the winnings, and the payout ball guide passage 208 is received. Is paid out directly to the upper plate 26 via the player and given to the player. In addition, when a combination of symbols with payout of pachinko balls is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the number of payout balls determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line And the total number of pachinko balls to be paid out will be paid out to the player. However, an upper limit (75 balls in this embodiment) is set for the number of pachinko balls to be paid out in one game. If the total number of payout balls exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of pachinko balls is set. Will be paid out. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, a payout control board 60, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 75. The game control board 40 mainly controls the game. The payout control board 60 controls the payout of the pachinko balls, the effect control board 90 controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and the power supply board 75 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. And supplied to each part.

  The power supply board 75 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the payout control board 60 and the effect control board 90 connected via. The power switch 39 is connected to the power board 75.

  On the game control board 40, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reel sensor 33, the stop switch 36, the setting key switch 37, Various switches such as a reset / setting switch 38, a take-in ball detection switch 105, a return ball detection switch 103, a return ball clogging detection switch 111, and a flow path detection switch 115 are connected, and via a payout control board 60. The aforementioned payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are connected, and detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the above-described captured / paid-off ball display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3BET LEDs 14-16, capture request LED 17, start valid LED 18, wait LED 19, and replaying. Electrical components such as LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, take-in motor 101, and sorting solenoid 102 are connected. These electric components are driven based on the control of a game control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 comprises a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The game control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 75 The reel motor drive circuit 45 that drives the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the take-in motor drive circuit 50 that drives the take-in motor 101, the solenoid drive circuit 46 that drives the sorting solenoid 102, and the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for driving various displays and LEDs connected to the slot, slot When the power supply voltage supplied to the thin 1 is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the game control unit 41, when the power is turned on or from the CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for providing a reset signal to the CPU 41a when an initialization command is not input for a certain period, and various other devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the game control unit 41.

  The game control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via these signal input terminals DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 0 to 3 can be executed, and a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA is provided for each interrupt. Can be selected and set in either an interrupt mode for generating an external interrupt in accordance with the timer mode or an interrupt mode for generating an internal interrupt in accordance with the number of clock inputs to the CPU 41a.

  In this embodiment, among interrupts 0 to 3, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupts 0 and 1 are set to the timer mode, and interrupt 3 is unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. In addition, the CPU 41a performs a time interval (this time) when the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 1 reaches the first specified number, that is, the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 1 reaches the first specified number. In the embodiment, an interrupt 1 is generated every approximately 0.56 ms) to execute a timer interrupt process (A) for detecting switches and controlling the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, etc. Each time the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 0 reaches the second specified number, that is, the time interval for the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 0 to reach the second specified number (in this embodiment, approximately 0 .4 ms), an interrupt 0 is generated and a timer interrupt process (B) for controlling the drive of the take-in motor 101 is executed. Moreover, although the interruption 3 is set to unused, the interruption 3 may generate | occur | produce with noise etc. For this reason, when the interrupt 3 occurs, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  In addition, the CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of an interrupt process based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 0 to 3, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, the priority is set to be executed in the order of interrupts 2, 1, 0, and 3. That is, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 1 and interrupt 0 or 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 1 is prioritized. When interrupt 0 and interrupt 3 occur at the same time, interrupt 0 is executed with priority.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of the interrupt process based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 0 to 3. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  The RAM 41c uses a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) and requires a refresh operation to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with a refresh register 41R (see FIG. 40) for performing this refresh operation. The refresh register 41R is composed of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b. The value is updated every execution time of one instruction. Is called.

  Further, the game control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (A) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 inputs / outputs various signals to / from the payout control board 60 via the I / O port 41d. The input / output of signals between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 will be described later.

  The payout control board 60 is connected to the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 described above, and the detection signals of these connected switches are input. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are branched on the payout control board 60 and also to the game control board 40. The detection signals of these switches are also input to the game control board 40.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are branched on the payout control board 60 and input to the game control board 40. Although the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are connected to the game control board 40, the transmission line of the detection signal is branched on the game control board 40. The game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 may be configured to input detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205. It may be possible to branch on a separately provided relay board and input to both the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60. .

  Further, the transmission lines of the detection signals of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 to the game control board 40 are used when the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 communicate with each other. It is connected to the game control board 40 through a single cable integrated together with the transmission line to be used, and the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the connector for connecting the cable and each board are also supplied. The detection signal transmission line of the ball detection switch 205 is shared by the transmission line used when the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 communicate with each other.

  Also, the payout control board 60 is connected to electrical components such as the payout motor 201 described above, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a payout control unit 61 (described later) mounted on the payout control board 60. It has become so.

  The payout control board 60 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 61a, a ROM 61b, a RAM 61c, and an I / O port 61d, similar to the game control part 41, and a payout control part 61 that controls the payout of pachinko balls. A switch detection circuit 62 that detects a detection signal input from a switch connected to the substrate 60, a payout motor drive circuit 63 that drives the payout motor 201, a display drive circuit 64 that drives various LEDs, etc. A reset circuit 65 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 61a when the initialization command from the CPU 61a is not input for a certain period, other circuits, and the like are mounted. The CPU 61a can output a signal output from the game control board 40 or a payout control. In response to a detection signal from a switch connected to the substrate 60, the pachinko ball is paid out. The payout control is performed, and the control of the control circuit mounted on the payout control board 60 is performed directly or directly while lending the pachinko ball according to the request from the card unit 400 connected via the connection terminal board 70. Control indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 61a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. The CPU 61a performs a timer interrupt process (payout) for generating a pachinko ball payout control or a lending control by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a fixed number, that is, every fixed time interval (about 2 ms). Execute. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 61a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the game control unit 41, the payout control unit 61 is not supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 61c is not held at the time of a power failure.

  The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front door 1c, an effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LEDs 55 that irradiate the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from behind. Electrical components are connected, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Like the game control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d. The effect control board 91 and the effect control board 90 control the effect. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 that controls the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 that controls the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls for performing the production, it is mounted on the production control board 90. Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit.

  As with the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interruption terminal (not shown) of the effect control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the game control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the CPU 91 a A command reception interrupt process for generating an interrupt based on the input and receiving a command transmitted from the game control unit 41 is executed. Further, the CPU 91a generates an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 1.12 ms), and executes a timer interruption process (effect) described later. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  In addition, the production control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Next, signals input / output in the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the card unit 400 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40 confirms the connection check between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 on the payout control board 60 side. To output a game control board connection confirmation signal. Then, the payout control unit 61 mounted on the payout control board 60 confirms the connection with the game control board 40 based on the detection of the game control board connection confirmation signal. In addition, the game control unit 41 gives the payout control board 60 a ball number signal indicating a value of 0 to 100 as the number of balls instructing payout by a settlement request or a payout request, Of the number of balls used and the number of used balls used to set the number of bets and the number of unused balls not yet used to set the number of bets) or a settlement request signal for requesting the settlement of the number of unused balls The payout request signal for requesting the payout of the prize ball is output. Then, when the payout control unit 61 detects the settlement request signal or the payout request signal, the payout control unit 61 performs payout control for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal at that time.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 61 makes a payout control board connection confirmation signal for checking the connection confirmation between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 on the game control board 40 side, the card unit 400 to the game control board 40. And an in-operation signal indicating the start, operation, and end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payment request or payout request. Then, the game control unit 41 confirms the connection with the payout control board 60 based on the detection of the payout control board connection confirmation signal, and connects the payout control board 60 and the card unit 400 based on the detection of the card unit connection signal. Based on the detection of the in-operation signal, the start, operation, and end of the pachinko ball payout operation by the payout control unit 61 are confirmed.

  The card unit 400 includes a control unit on which a microcomputer is mounted. As shown in FIG. 6, the remaining amount indicator 28 provided in the slot machine 1 is connected to the card unit 400 via a connection terminal board 70, and the remaining amount is controlled by a microcomputer mounted on the control unit. The display device 28 is driven. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the card unit 400 is connected to the above-mentioned ball rental switch 29 and the return switch 30 provided in the slot machine 1 via a connection terminal plate 70, and detection signals of these switches are detected. Is input to the control unit.

  The card unit 400 also includes a card reader / writer that reads and writes the recorded information of the prepaid card inserted from the card insertion slot, and the card reader / writer stores the recorded information read from the prepaid card as a control unit. And the record information of the prepaid card inserted is updated based on a command from the control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the card unit 400 has a card unit connection signal (VL) indicating that the card unit 400 is normally connected to the payout control board 60 (the payout control unit 61) of the slot machine 1. The card unit READY signal (BRDY) indicating the start and end of the lending process by the card unit 400 and the lending request signal (BRQ) requesting the lending of the pachinko ball are output. The card unit connection signal is also a power source for communication between the control unit and the payout control board 60.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 60 (the payout control unit 61) has a slot machine READY signal (SRDY) indicating a state in which the pachinko ball can be lent to the card unit 400, and a pachinko ball based on BRQ. A lending completion signal (EXS) indicating the start and completion of lending operation is output.

  Further, as described above, the remaining amount indicator 28, the ball rental switch 29 and the return switch 30 mounted in the slot machine 1 are connected to the card unit 400, and the remaining amount indicator 28 is output based on the control of the control unit. The detection signal (lending operation detection signal) of the ball lending switch 29 and the detection signal (return operation detection signal) of the return switch 30 are input to the card unit 400. Then, the control unit mounted on the card unit 400 outputs the BRDY described above on condition that the valuable value read from the prepaid card being accepted remains as a result of the ball-lending switch 29 being detected. The above-mentioned BRQ is output, and the processing for requesting the lending unit for lending unit (25 balls in this embodiment) to the slot machine 1 is performed within the range of the remaining valuable value (in this embodiment, 10 times), and when the return switch 30 is detected, the prepaid card being accepted is returned.

  Next, the operation state of the slot machine 1 based on the control of the game control unit 41 and the payout control unit 61 described above will be described based on the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 7 shows that when a winning with payout of a winning ball occurs, when an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state in which a captured ball remains, a bet number of 1 or more is set and an unused ball is It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the state which remains.

  When a winning with payout of a winning ball occurs, when an operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where a captured ball remains, a bet number of 1 or more is set and an unused ball remains When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the game control unit 41 uses the value of the ball number signal to request the payout by the payout request (number of payout requests) or the number of balls to request the payout by the checkout request (settlement) The request number is updated to a value (tb1), and the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is turned on (tb2). Specifically, when a winning accompanied with a payout of a winning ball occurs, the value of the ball number signal is updated to a value indicating the number of winning balls given when the winning is generated, and the payout request signal is set to on. If the operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where the captured ball remains, that is, a state where a bet number of 1 or more is set or an unused ball remains, the value of the ball signal Is updated to a value indicating the acquired number of balls, which is the sum of the number of used balls and the number of unused balls used to set the number of bets, and the settlement request signal is turned on. Further, when an operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where one or more bets are set and an unused ball remains, the value of the ball number signal is updated to a value indicating the number of unused balls, The settlement request signal is turned on.

  When the payout control unit 61 detects that the payout request signal or the checkout request signal is on, the game control unit 41 is notified of the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the checkout request by turning on the operation signal (tb3). ). Then, a payout operation for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal is started (tb4), and when the payout operation is completed (tb5), the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request or the settlement request is made with the in-operation signal turned off. Is notified to the game control unit 41 (tb6). Next, when the game control unit 41 detects the off-operation signal, it confirms the end of the payout operation, and sets the payout request signal or the settlement request signal to off (tb7). In addition, the game control unit 41 validates the detection of the payout ball by the payout ball detection switch 202 only during the period (tb3 to tb6) from when the on-operation signal is detected to when off is detected. Every time a payout ball is detected, the value of an unpaid ball counter (a counter that stores the number of payout balls that have not been paid out of the number of payout requests based on the payout request) set in the RAM 41c or an unsettled ball counter The value of (the counter that stores the number of unsettled spheres that have not been paid out of the number of settlement requests based on the settlement request) is subtracted and updated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of the pachinko balls changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, the power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and the data for destructive diagnosis (5A (H) in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. ing. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and is canceled until a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. There is nothing to do.

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number according to the gaming state, and whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is an appropriate value. judge.

  Even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or when the set value used for the internal lottery is not an appropriate value, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM abnormal error code is set and the RAM is set. The game is controlled to an abnormal error state and the progress of the game is disabled. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus and a normal gaming state as gaming states. Among these, 1 is set as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, and a bet corresponding to the normal gaming state is set. 3 is defined as the prescribed number. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the game is started when the betting number is set to 3. Can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the gaming status, but can be broadly divided into small roles with payout of pachinko balls (prize balls) and the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a re-playing role that can be started and a special role that accompanies the transition of the gaming state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 9A shows the winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the game control unit 41, and the combination numbers (1 to 14) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to combinations of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, the special bonus is the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the small role is cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell Replay is defined as a role. In addition, combinations of the roles in the slot machine 1 include big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 ball (1), big bonus (2) +1 ball (1), Big bonus (1) +1 ball (2) and big bonus (2) +1 ball (2) are defined. That is, the total number of combinations of combinations and combinations is 14.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9A, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a regular bonus. . Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it depends on whether any special role is being carried over (whether any special role has already been set in the winning flag of the special role). The combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to lottery are also different. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “1” is set as the state number, and “2” is set as the state number in the case of a regular bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the big bonus (1 ), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 ball (2), big bonus (2) + 1 ball (2), replay, cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell, that is, all combinations and combinations of combinations It becomes the object of. When the game state is the normal game state and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, replay, cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 The ball (2), the bell, that is, the combination of the combination of the combination number 10 and the combination of the combination is the target of the internal lottery. When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “3” is set as the state number, cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell, that is, the role and the combination of the role number 11 and later The combination is subject to internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and 10 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, 75 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. Since you won the cherry on the winning line, 20 pachinko balls (prize balls) will be paid out in the normal gaming state, but in the regular bonus, you won the cherry on the two winning lines. Even so, since the upper limit of the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) to be paid out in one game is set to 75 balls, only 75 pachinko balls (prize balls) will be paid out. One ball (1) is awarded when a combination of “blue 7-red 7-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one pachinko ball (award) in the normal gaming state. Ball) is paid out, and 75 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out in the regular bonus. One ball (2) is awarded when the combination of “Red 7-Blue 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one pachinko ball (award) in the normal gaming state. Ball) is paid out, and 75 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out in the regular bonus. A bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 40 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, 75 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, but with the regular bonus, even if this combination is arranged, the replay is not won. When a replay is won, the pachinko ball (prize ball) will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game (regular bonus will not be replayed) Therefore, it is substantially the same as that 15 pachinko balls (prize balls) corresponding to 3) are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, and when the regular bonus ends, if the big bonus is not terminated, the transition is made to the regular bonus again and repeated until the big bonus is terminated. Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 2326 balls. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Further, the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus”.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state are referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination of the combination numbers 1 to 14 is referred to. And combinations of roles, that is, big bonus (1) [port number 1], big bonus (2) [port number 2], regular bonus [port number 3], big bonus (1) + cherry [port number 4], big Bonus (2) + cherry [role number 5], big bonus (1) +1 ball (1) [role number 6], big bonus (2) +1 ball (1) [role number 7], big bonus (1) +1 Ball (2) [Role No. 8], Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (2) [Role No. 9], Replay [Role No. 10], Cherry [Role No. 11], 1 ball (1) [Role No. 12] 1 ball (2) [role number 13], Le [winning number 14 are sequentially read as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the status number is set to “1”, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination numbers 10 to 10 are referred to. 14 roles and combinations of roles, that is, replay [role number 10], cherry [role number 11], 1 ball (1) [role number 12], 1 ball (2) [role number 13], bell [role number 14 ] Are sequentially read out as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of the combinations of the combination numbers 11 to 14, that is, cherry [portion number 11] 1 ball (1) [combination number 12], 1 ball (2) [combination number 13], and bell [combination number 14] are sequentially read out as internal lottery target roles.

In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that is the subject of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows, It is judged that it was won.
When a winning combination of any combination or combination of roles is determined, a special combination storing work and a general combination storing work assigned to the RAM 41c with a winning flag corresponding to the combination of winning combination or combination determined to be winning Set to. Specifically, when any of the roles (special roles) of the role numbers 1 to 3 is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the role numbers 4 to 9 (special role + general role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 10 to 14 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values for each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the game control unit 41.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role-specific table, as shown in FIG. 9B, the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus ( 1) +1 ball (1), big bonus (2) +1 ball (1), big bonus (1) +1 ball (2), big bonus (2) +1 ball (2), replay, cherry, 1 ball (1) 1 ball (2) and the storage address of the number of determination values of the bell are registered.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball ( 1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (2) are eligible for internal lottery when none of the special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state The storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 0 is registered. For the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value. Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2), Big For bonus (2) +1 ball (2), the common flag is 1, and a storage address for the number of common determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Replay is a combination that is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether or not a special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1 is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, 1 ball (1), and 1 ball (2) are roles that are subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, and the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1 and state number 2 And the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to each are registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The bell is a role that is subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, and has a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1 and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state number 2. Each is registered. The common flag for this combination is 0, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values are individually registered according to the set value.

  In addition, the number of payout balls of a pachinko ball (prize ball) to be paid out when winning each winning combination is also registered in the role-specific table. Of course, the winning combination of the pachinko ball (prize ball) when winning a prize is only a small role cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and a bell. These small roles can be awarded in any gaming state, but when the state number is 2, that is, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, when the state number is 0, that is, the gaming state More pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out than when the player is in the normal gaming state. In addition, if “cherry” stops at the top or bottom of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two pay lines as described above, so the total number of payout balls is Will be paid out. In the present embodiment, since the number of cherries paid out is 10 in the normal gaming state, 20 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out. In the regular bonus, the number of cherries paid out is 75, but the total number of balls exceeds the upper limit of 75, so in this case, 75 pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out.

  The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus winning are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not subject to payout of a pachinko ball (prize ball). In replay, there is no payout of pachinko balls (prize balls), but in the next game (always the normal game state), it is not necessary to insert pachinko balls used to set the number of bets, so in effect 15 balls are paid out. does not change.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the game control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, when the address ADD is a game state of state number 0, that is, in a state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 1. This is an address to be referred to. At this time, 15 which is a value stored here is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referred to when the target role of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 2 to 6 in the gaming state of state number 0. . Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are addresses that are referred to when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (2) and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 0. It is. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively, in the gaming state of state number 0.

  Regarding the big bonus (1) and big bonus (2) in the gaming state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the number of judgment values is individually stored according to the set value. In addition, since different numbers of determination values are stored, the winning probabilities of these combinations and combinations of combinations differ depending on the set values.

  On the other hand, for the regular bonus in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. Since the number of determination values is stored, the regular bonus winning probability is the same for any set value.

  In addition, the address ADD + 36 is set to the set value when the internal lottery target role is big bonus (1) + cherry in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special role is carried over. Regardless of the address to be referred to, the address ADD + 38 is the big bonus (2) + in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when it is a cherry, and the address ADD + 40 is an object of the internal lottery in the game state of the state number 0, that is, in the state where no special role is carried over in the normal game state It is an address that is referenced regardless of the set value when the winning combination is a big bonus (1) + 1 ball (1) The address ADD + 42 is a set value when the internal lottery target role is a big bonus (2) +1 ball (1) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state Regardless of the address that is referenced, the address ADD + 44 is a big bonus (1) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. +1 ball (2) is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value, and the address ADD + 46 is an internal number in the game state in which the special number is not carried over in the state number 0, that is, the normal game state. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when the target combination of the lottery is big bonus (2) +1 ball (2).

  The address ADD + 48 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, the target combination of the internal lottery is replay.

  The address ADD + 50 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the subject combination of the internal lottery is cherry. The address ADD + 52 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target part of the internal lottery is cherry.

  The address ADD + 54 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, the target combination of the internal lottery is 1 ball (1). The address ADD + 56 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target combination of the internal lottery is one ball (1).

  The address ADD + 58 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, the target combination of the internal lottery is 1 ball (2). The address ADD + 60 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target combination of the internal lottery is one ball (2).

  Addresses ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, and ADD + 72 are in the game state of state number 0 and state number 1, that is, in the normal game state, and the target combination of the internal lottery is Bell and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. This address is referred to by Addresses ADD + 74, ADD + 76, ADD + 78, ADD + 80, ADD + 82, and ADD + 84 are addresses that are referenced when the target number of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 2, that is, the regular bonus. It is. Regarding the bell in the gaming state of the gaming state 2, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value, but the number of determination values of the setting values 1 and 2, the number of determination values of 3 and 4, 5 and 6 Since the common determination value number is stored in each of the determination value numbers, the winning probabilities of the setting values 1 and 2 are the same, the winning probabilities of the 3 and 4 are common.

  FIGS. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between a value of a random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. FIG. 11A shows a case where no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 11B shows a case where any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. Here are some examples of regular bonuses. 11A to 11C show examples in which the set value is 6.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 11A, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and Bell are subject to internal lottery. In the set value 6, the number of determination values of each combination is 20, 20, 31, 10 10, 5, 5, 5, 5, 2245, 96, 163, 163, 2082. The big bonus (1), which is the target of the internal lottery, is the result of adding the judgment value number of 20 and the result of addition overflows when 16364 to 16383 are acquired as random numbers for the internal lottery. Become.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 40, which is the sum of the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16344 to 16363, which will overflow, are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, the regular bonus is a big bonus when 16313 to 16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the big bonus (1) + cherry is a big bonus when 16303 to 1631 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + Cherry is obtained when 16293-16302 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) +1 ball (1) is acquired when 16288-16292 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery When the big bonus (2) +1 ball (1) is acquired as random numbers for internal lottery 16283-16287, the big bonus (1) +1 ball (2) is random numbers for internal lottery 16278-16282 When obtained as a big bonus (2) + 1 ball (2), 16273 to 16277 are random numbers for internal lottery The replay is acquired when 14028-16272 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the cherry is played with one ball (1) when 13932-14027 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. ) When 13769-13931 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 1 ball (2) is acquired when 13606-13768 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. When it is acquired as a random number for lottery, it is determined that each is a win. When 0 to 11523 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 Ball (2), Replay , Cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 528.5, 1/1638, 1/1638, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1 / 7.3, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), when any special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, only replay, cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and bell are inside. Since the number of determination values for each combination is 2245, 96, 163, 163, 2082 at the set value 6, it is 14139-16383, 14043-14138, 13880-14042, 13717-13789, 11635. When ˜13716 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, each is determined to be a winner. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 7.3, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87. When 0-11634 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11C, in the regular bonus, only the cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and the bell are subject to the internal lottery. Since the determination value numbers are 96, 163, 163, and 15919, when 16288 to 16383, 16125 to 16287, 15962 to 16124, and 43 to 15961 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, they are determined to be winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1 / 7.1 and 1/128. When 0 to 55823 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all the combinations are lost.

  Next, acquisition of random numbers for internal lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The random numbers for the internal lottery are obtained by extracting random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 by the hardware random number function and processing them by software by the CPU 41a. Note that the least significant bit of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 or the processed random number is called the 0th bit, and the most significant bit is called the 15th bit.

  FIG. 12A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number generation circuit 42 in detail. As shown in the figure, the random number generation circuit 42 includes a pulse generation circuit 42a, a lower counter 42b, and an upper counter 42c. The lower counter 42b and the upper counter 42c are both 8-bit (1 byte) counters, the lower counter 42b is the 0th to 7th bits, and the upper counter 42c is a total of 16 bits from the 8th to 15th bits. The data signal is output.

  The pulse generation circuit 42a outputs a pulse signal at a frequency that is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a and is not an integral multiple thereof (preferably relatively prime). The pulse signal output from the pulse generation circuit 42a is clocked into the lower counter 42b.

  The lower counter 42b alternately inverts the 0th bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit 42a. Assuming that positive logic is applied, a logical value of H level corresponds to 1 and a logical value of L level corresponds to 0. In the case of negative logic, a logic value of 1 may be read as L level, and a logic value of 0 may be read as H level. When the level of the 0th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the 0th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the level of the 1st bit data signal is changed to H level. Inverted alternately with L level.

  Similarly, when the level of the (m−1) th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the (m−1) th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the mth bit data The signal level is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level. The carry signal is output every time the level of the seventh bit data signal changes from H level, that is, the logical value of the seventh bit data signal changes from 1 to 0. The carry signal output from the lower counter 42b is clocked into the upper counter 42c.

  The upper counter 42c alternately inverts the eighth bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a carry signal is input from the lower counter 42b. Each time the level of the eighth bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, the level of the ninth bit data signal is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level. Similarly, every time the level of the m−1th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, the level of the mth bit data signal is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level.

  The logic value of a 16-bit data signal in which the data signal of the lower counter 42b is the lower 8 bits and the data signal of the upper counter 42c is the upper 8 bits is 0 (0000H) every time the pulse generation circuit 42a outputs the pulse signal. ) → 1 (0001H) → 2 (0002H) →... → 65535 (FFFFH) The values are updated so as to be continuous every update, and the maximum value 65535 (FFFFH) is next to the initial value 0 (0000H). The value circulates and is output from the random number generation circuit 42.

  The sampling circuit 43 includes a latch circuit, and latches and latches a 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 at that time based on a sampling command (when the start switch 7 is operated) from the CPU 41a. Output the data signal. The CPU 41a extracts numerical data corresponding to the data signal input from the sampling circuit 43 via the I / O port 41d as a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. In the following description, the data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 is described as a random number corresponding to the logical value.

  FIG. 12B is an explanatory diagram until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. The random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a uses the calculation register to store the lower byte (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the general-purpose register 41GR and the upper byte. The value (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c) is exchanged.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs an OR operation on the value of the random number obtained by exchanging the upper byte and the lower byte for the extracted random number with 8080H. Since the processing work of the CPU 41a is 1 byte, the logical sum operation is actually sequentially performed on the upper byte and the lower byte. By this OR operation, the 15th bit and the 7th bit are always 1. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit.

  The CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values for each combination. Since the 15th and 14th bits of the random number for internal lottery are always 1, the random number for internal lottery is a random number having a size of 14 bits (16384), which is substantially 0 to 16383. It takes a value.

  Note that interrupts to the CPU 41a are prohibited from the extraction of random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 to the end of processing. This is to prevent the contents of the general-purpose register 41GR from being rewritten in the interrupt processing routine when an interrupt is generated to the CPU 41a.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the table index contains table creation data from the reference address (table_index) when referring to the table index, depending on the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state). Differences up to the address where the index data indicating the head address of the stored area is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  Specifically, lose, cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), bell, replay, big bonus (1) (+ lose), big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (1) + 1 ball (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 Ball (2), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay, Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + 1 ball (1), Big bonus (2) + 1 ball (2), Big bonus (2) + Bell, Big bonus (2) + Replay, Regular bonus (+ Loss), Regular bonus + Cherry, Regular Table for bonus + 1 ball (1), regular bonus + 1 ball (2), regular bonus + bell, regular bonus + replay Index data indicating the leading address of the formation data is stored area is stored. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, if the same control is applied (for example, big bonus (1) + replay winning, big bonus (2) + replay winning, regular bonus + replay winning In this case, the same address is stored as index data. In such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Will be.

  The table creation data is composed of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to in accordance with the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referenced according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may vary depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, the address of the number of frames to be drawn to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and based on the top address of the table creation data , It is possible to specify the address of the number of frame data to be referred to according to each situation, and it is necessary according to each situation from this identified address. It has to be able to identify the lead-frame number data. Even if the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the drawn frame number data when the same drawn frame number data is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of frames to be drawn is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIG. 14, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 from the position are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data as described above corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (this In the embodiment, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed at the timing (the timing at which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) positioned in the fluoroscopic window 3 lower symbol area). It is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn when detected is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. Acquires the address of the data for the number of drawn frames corresponding to each reel corresponding to the rotating state of the reel, and develops the data for the number of drawn frames for each reel stored at the acquired address to create a stop control table for all the reels. .

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stopped frame and the number of pull-in number data of the unstopped reel corresponding to the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained. The number-of-drawing frame number data stored in each reel is expanded to create a stop control table for unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number corresponding to the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. It stops at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3).

  The table index of this embodiment stores only one address as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state. Furthermore, one table creation data includes one table data. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and number-of-drawing frame number data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined, The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  Also, in the table index, the number of frames to be drawn in to the address corresponding to the case where one of the winning combinations is won, with the winning combination being drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames, so that the winning combination is not aligned For creating a table with the number of frames to be drawn in, so that the index data for identifying the table creation data for which is defined is stored, and the address corresponding to the case where the winning is lost is not included in any role Stores index data for specifying data. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. The reel stop control is performed, and if no winning combination is selected, a stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn that does not have any winning combination is determined, and the reel stop control is performed. Done. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align them and stop. The symbol of the winning combination will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  Also, in the table index, the address corresponding to the case where a small role is elected with a special role carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, etc.) The number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the selected special role can be drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the stoppage position where the selected special role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames is selected. The index data for specifying the data for creating the table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the number of frames is drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to stop them together. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  Also, in the table index, when the re-game player is elected in the state where the special game has been carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Replay, etc.), the re-game player has 4 frames. Index data for specifying table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within a range is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8, “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and 4 frames are drawn in. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flag for the bell and the replay is set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  In addition, when the replay winning flag is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Replay” symbol must be used as a stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. When a stop control table for drawing on L2 or L5 is created, and the “replay” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel or the right reel, the stop control table for the left reel is 5 The “replay” symbol of the number, that is, when the symbol is stopped on the winning line L2 or L5, the “replay” symbol excluding the “replay” symbol that also stops the “cherry” on the winning line L1. A stop control table is created to draw on the winning line L2 or L5, and the middle reel and right reel are moved from the left reel. When stopped first, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5, and when the left reel is stopped thereafter, the “replay” symbol other than No. 5 is always placed on the winning line L2 or L5. Therefore, for example, when the “replay” symbol of No. 5 stops on the winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel and the right reel, the replay and the cherry are not won simultaneously. In the left reel, the 2nd “Replay” design and the 7th “Replay” design are arranged within 4 frames, so even if control is performed to avoid the 5th “Replay” design, Regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, the replay can always be won. If the left reel is stopped while all the reels are still rotating when the replay winning flag is set, except for the case where the replay and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “replay” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is first stopped, control is performed so that the combination of “replay” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  In addition, when the winning flag for the bell is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Bell” symbol must be used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table is drawn in on L1, and when the “bell” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L1 of the middle reel or the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as the stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table for drawing on the winning line L1 in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, Thereafter, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” symbol is always drawn on the winning line L1. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged continuously. For this reason, the bell can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, and the bell and the cherry are not simultaneously won. If the left reel is stopped while all the reels are still rotating when the bell winning flag is set, except for the case where the bell and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “bell” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is first stopped, control is performed so that the combination of “bells” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. The chance in this embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state or when one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won. In this embodiment, the display result of the left reel is “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2-4 or “bell / red 7 bell” of symbols 8-10, “replay” of symbols 15-17. "Blue 7 Watermelon" stops and no display of the winning lines on the winning line, the display result of the middle reel is "Cherry Replay Cherry" of No. 11-13, 20, 21, 1 The “Cherry Bell Cherry” of the number symbol is stopped, the display mode in which none of the roles are aligned on the winning line, and the display result of the right reel is “Replay Cherry Blue 7” of the number 9-12 symbol. Stop and any Have applied the display mode also not aligned on a winning line as a chance eyes.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state. As a result of the display on the left reel, the display mode in which “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 stops is the reach of all bonuses, and symbols 20, 20, 1 or 12 to 14 The “Replay Watermelon Bell” on the symbol stops, the display mode in which none of the roles are aligned on the winning line is stopped, and the display mode in which no role is aligned on the winning line is displayed as a big bonus (1) or It is applied as a regular bonus reach.

  Further, in this embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when one ball (1), one ball (2) is won, each reel 2L, 2C, 2R Regardless of the order in which the stop operations are performed, it is controlled so that chances can be derived, and when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is Regardless of the order in which they are performed, the reach is controlled so that it can be derived, provided that each reel is stopped in an order that satisfies a specific condition (eg, left, middle, right). You may be able to derive your chance and reach.

  Here, an example of reel stop control when deriving the chance and reach will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 shows a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), and one ball (1) is won without any bonus being carried over (one ball (1)). If one ball (2) is elected with no bonuses carried over (1 ball (2)), if a cherry is elected without any bonus carried over (cherries), If the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won and no other role is won (BB (1) RB), the big bonus (2) is won and no other role is won It is a figure which shows the stop control table of the left reel produced in the case (BB (2)).

  First, in a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a stop control table corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 14 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. In this stop control table, “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 for all area numbers, “bell / red 7 bell” of symbols 8 to 10 and “ "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon", 12-14 design "Replay Watermelon Bell", 16-18 design "Blue 7 Watermelon Blue 7", 20, 21, 1 design "Replay The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than “watermelon bell” is specified is determined, and 2 to 4 are display results constituting a chance eye when a left reel stop operation is detected at any timing. In the display results that comprise the "Replay Watermelon Bell" of the number 8 symbol, the "Bell Red 7 Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbol, and the "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon" of the 15th to 17th symbol There is a 12-14 pattern "Replay Watermelon Bell" No. 6-18 symbols "Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7", 20, 21, No. 1 symbols "Replay / Watermelon / Bell" are not derived as display results, and finally chances and reach eyes Does not hold.

  When one ball (1) is won in a state where no bonus is carried over in the normal game state (1 ball (1)), one ball (1 in FIG. 14) is used as the stop control table for the left reel. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, display results for “blue 7” constituting a combination of one ball (1) to stop on any pay line for the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 are specified. The number of drawn frames is determined. Particularly, for the area numbers 18 and 19, the number of drawn frames for specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 4 to 8, and “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 is specified for the region numbers 10 to 14. The number of drawn frames is determined, and the number of drawn frames for specifying a display result other than the display result including the display mode that configures the chance and reach for other area numbers is determined.

  Therefore, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21, that is, the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at a possible timing, a display result in which the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 18 and 19 among the timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 15th to 17th symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” are derived, and if the combination of 1 ball (1) is not aligned on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 8 among the timings at which the “blue 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result, and a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 10 to 14, “bell bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is detected. “Red 7 Bell” is derived as a display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance is established. In addition, even when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as a display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one ball (1) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn to identify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Blue 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the ball (1) is elected, “Blue 7” that constitutes the combination of one ball (1) is higher in proportion than the display result is derived that stops on any winning line, Chance eyes Among the displayed results, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one ball (1) cannot be won. "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" will be derived.

  When one ball (2) is won in a state where no bonus is carried over in the normal game state (1 ball (2)), one ball (2 in FIG. 14) is used as the stop control table for the left reel. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, for the region numbers 9 to 15, the number of drawn frames for specifying the display result that “red 7” constituting the combination of one ball (2) stops on any pay line is specified. In particular, for the region numbers 12 and 13, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is specified is determined. In addition, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 6 to 8, and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 is specified for the region numbers 17 to 21. The number of drawn-in frames is determined, and the number of drawn-in frames in which display results other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the chance and reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timing of the area numbers 9 to 15, that is, the timing at which the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected, a display result in which the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (2) stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 12 and 13 among the timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn in a range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are derived, and if the combination of one ball (2) is not aligned on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the area numbers 6 to 8 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When the “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 17 to 21, “replay “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is derived as the display result. In these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, the chance chance is established. In addition, even when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as a display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation was detected at a timing when the “red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, when one ball (2) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn to identify “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Red 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the ball (2) is elected, a higher rate than the display result in which “red 7” constituting the combination of one ball (2) stops on any winning line is derived, Chan Among the display results constituting the eyes, “Replay Watermelon Bell” and 15 to 17 of symbols 2 to 4 derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (2) cannot be won. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” will be derived.

  When the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the stop control table for the left reel is set in the item BB (1) RB in FIG. A corresponding stop control table is created. In the stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols is specified for the area numbers 6 to 8 is determined. Number of drawing frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the design symbol is specified is determined, and for the area number 17, 20, 21, the number of drawing frames in which “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the design is specified The number of frames to be drawn that specifies the “replay watermelon bell” of the 12th to 14th symbols for the area number 16 is determined, and the “replay / blue” of the 15th to 17th symbols for the area number 17 “7. Watermelon” is specified, and the number of drawn frames is specified for area numbers 18 and 19, and “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” is specified for symbols 16-18. For other area numbers. Number pull frames are determined eye display result other than the display results and a display mode which constitutes a is specified.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and finally on the winning line Since there will be no winning combination, a chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as the display result, and finally the big on the winning line If the combination of bonus (1) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, and a chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and the winning combination is finally placed on the winning line. Since there is no match, chances will be established.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 16, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 12 to 14 is derived as the display result, and at the timing of the area number 1, the left reel is When a stop operation is detected, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 20, 21, No. 1 is derived as a display result, and in any case, no winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Therefore, the reach that can appear only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus (1) is won is established. The 16th to 18th symbols “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” are derived as the display result, and the reach that is common to all bonuses is established.

  When the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, the stop control corresponding to the item of BB (2) in FIG. A table is created. In this stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4 is specified for the area numbers 4-7 is determined, and 8-10 for the area numbers 12-14. The number of drawn frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the number symbol is specified is determined, and the number of drawn frames in which “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the number 15 to 17 is identified for the area number 17 The number of frames to be drawn in which “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 is specified for the area numbers 19 to 21 is determined. The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than the display result including the display mode constituting the eye is specified is determined.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and the region numbers 12 to 14 When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of, the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is derived as the display result, and the winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Since there is no chance, a chance will be established. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and finally a big is displayed on the winning line. If the combination of bonuses (2) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, and a chance will be established. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19 to 21, “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is derived as a display result and is common to all bonuses. The reach will be established.

  As described above, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, No. of No. 8-10 A stop control table that can specify “bell / red 7 / bell”, “replay / blue 7 / watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  Or, when only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one ball (1) cannot be won among the display results constituting the chance eye , "Replay watermelon bell" of the 2nd to 4th symbols, and "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols can be specified as the display result, and "Blue" constituting the combination of one ball (1) 7 ”is a stop control table that can specify“ Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon ”of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbol can be stopped on the winning line. It is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one ball (2) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one ball (2) cannot be won among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as display results, and constitute a combination of one ball (2). Stop control table that can identify "bell, red 7, bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the "red 7" symbol can be stopped on the winning line Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or when only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, or in the normal gaming state In this case, when only one ball (2) is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chances can be derived. In particular, when only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) cannot be stopped on the winning line, 2-4 It is possible to derive “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 as the display results, and “Blue 7” constituting a combination of one ball (1) When the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it becomes possible to derive “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 15 to 17 as the display result, and only one ball (2) in the normal gaming state When winning, if the “Red 7” symbols that make up one ball (2) cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Replay Watermelon Bell”, The 17th pattern “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” can be derived as a display result, and the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) can be stopped on the winning line. The symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” can be derived as a display result.

  In addition, when any of the roles is not won in the normal gaming state, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye and the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols A stop control table that can specify display results other than “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. Thus, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table that does not derive a chance.

  Also, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state In the case where only one ball (2) is elected, “Replay Watermelon” of symbols 2 to 4 constituting the chance eye when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, and 13・ "Bell" or 8-10 symbols "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" are derived as display results, but if no role is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the area number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2-4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8-10 are displayed as display results Derived Rukoto is not. That is, when the bonus or one ball (1) and one ball (2) are won, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the stop operation of the left reel at the above timing. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the left reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  At the start of reel rotation, the above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a stop control table for the left reel, and any one of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped. Even if both the middle reel and the right reel are stopped, if the symbols that make up the winning combination are on the winning line, or if a non-winning character wins The above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a left reel stop control table, except in the case where there is a possibility of the occurrence of a failure. In other words, when the left reel is stopped first, or when it is stopped second or third, the combination of symbols that make up the winning bonus is on the winning line of the already stopped reel Or, if there is a possibility that an unwinned role may win from the display result of a reel that has already been stopped, 1 ball (1) or 1 ball (2) will be won in the normal gaming state, If any bonus is won, reel stop control will be performed based on the stop control table from which chance chances can be derived. If no part is won, chances will not be derived. The reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table.

  Also, for the middle reel and the right reel, a stop control that can derive a chance when one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won in the normal gaming state or one of the bonuses is won. Stop control is performed based on the table.

  Although not specifically shown, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is Creates a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn that specifies the display result that constitutes the chance eye, as a stop control table for the middle reel, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel in the still rotating state In the state where at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel, the chance reel is configured as the stop control table for the right reel. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result to be specified is specified is created.

  Further, when only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one ball on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (1) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is determined as the stop control table for the middle reel. The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes one ball (1) combination on the winning line of the left reel stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “red 7” symbol that forms a combination of one ball (1) on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  In addition, when only one ball (1) is elected in the normal game state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one ball on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) is stopped, one ball is placed on the winning line where the “blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel as a stop control table for the middle reel. A winning line in which the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel for the area where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of pull-in frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of pull-in frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) is not stopped on the winning line, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the stop control table for the middle reel Is generated.

  Further, when only one ball (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one ball on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is defined as the stop control table for the middle reel The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one ball (2) on the winning line of the left reel stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Blue 7” symbol that forms a combination of one ball (2) on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  Further, when only one ball (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one ball on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) is stopped, one ball is placed on the winning line where the “red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel as a stop control table for the middle reel. A winning line in which the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped in the area where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of drawn frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of drawn frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the middle reel stop control table Is generated.

  On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state, the display constituting the chance eye is used as the stop control table for the middle reel or the right reel regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table in which the number of drawn frames other than the result is determined is created.

  Specifically, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the state, in the stop control table for the middle reel created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels, the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers is displayed. , 20, 21, when the number of frames to be drawn in which “Cherry Bell Cherry” is specified is determined, and when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, 11-13 One of the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21, and the symbol “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result. Since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  In the normal gaming state, when any of the bonuses is won and no other combination is won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers is displayed. When the number of drawn frames to be specified is determined and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” of symbols 9 to 12 is derived as the display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  When only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one ball (1) on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel created when the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of) is not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ Replay cherries ”, 20, 21, when the number of frames to be drawn that identifies“ Cherry Bell Cherry ”of the first symbol is determined, and when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers No. 11-13 “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21, No. 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result and finally entered Since the winning combination will not be aligned on the line, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one ball (1) on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination is stopped, one ball is placed on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One ball on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel against the area number where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result indicating that the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) stops is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left reel The “Blue 7” symbol has stopped On the prize line, 1 ball (1) "red 7" combination constitute the symbol is displayed to stop result is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “red 7” symbol on the winning line where the “blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn for which “Cherry Replay Cherry” of No. 11 to No. 13 and No. 21 and No. 1 of “Cherry Bell Cherry” are specified is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any of “Cherry Replay Cherries” of No. 11 to No. 13 and No. 20, 21, No. 1 of “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  That is, if only one ball (1) is elected, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and one ball (1) is placed on the winning line of the left reel. When the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the area number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the area number for identifying the display result constituting the combination of one ball (1) are A different stop control table is created.

  When only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one right ball (1) on the winning line of the left reel while the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one ball on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 1) is not stopped, the “9” symbol “12” described above for at least one of the area numbers is included. If the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is displayed. "It is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and at least one ball (2 on the winning line of the left reel is still rotating). In the middle reel stop control table created when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of) are not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ Replay cherries ”, 20, 21, when the number of frames to be drawn for which the first symbol“ Cherry Bell Cherry ”is specified is determined, and when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers No. 11-13 “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21, No. 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result and finally entered Since the winning combination will not be aligned on the line, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and at least one ball (2 on the winning line of the left reel is still rotating). In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination is stopped, one ball is placed on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One ball on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel against the area number where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result of “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left reel "Red 7" symbol is stopped On prize line, 1 ball (2) "Blue 7" display result symbol stops constituting a combination of is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “blue 7” symbol on the winning line where the “red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn that specifies “Cherry Replay Cherry” of No. 11-13 and No. 20, 21, “Cherry Bell Cherry” of No. 1 is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any of “Cherry Replay Cherries” of Nos. 11 to 13 and Nos. 20, 21, and No. 1 of “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  That is, when only one ball (2) is elected, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and one ball (2) is placed on the winning line of the left reel. When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the area number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the area number for identifying the display result constituting the combination of one ball (2) are A different stop control table is created.

  When only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left ball (2) is on the winning line of the left reel while the left reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one ball on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of 2) is not stopped, the “9” symbol “ If the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is displayed. "It is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  The middle reel stop control table created when no combination is won in the normal gaming state, the 11th to 13th for any area number, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels. The number of draw-in frames for which display results other than the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21 and 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” are specified is determined. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created when the winning combination is not won, the lead-in frame for which display results other than “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols are specified for any area number. Since the number is fixed, there is no chance that the chance will be finalized.

  In addition, when any bonus is won in the normal game state and any other combination is not won, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the case of only one ball (1) or one ball (2) winning in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel has already stopped and the middle reel is still In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created in the rotating state, the “cherry replay cherry” of Nos. 11 to 13 described above for the specific area number, Nos. 20, 21, and 1 are used. Created when the number of draws for which the symbol `` Cherry Bell Cherry '' is specified is determined, but in the normal game state no role is won In the middle reel stop control table, the 11th to 13th symbols "Cherry Replay Cherry", 20, 21, and the 1st symbol "Cherry Bell Cherry" are stored in the specified area number. The number of frames for which the display result is specified is defined. For this reason, when a bonus or one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won, the middle reel stop operation is performed at the timing of a specific area number, and the display result constituting the chance eye On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the middle reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  In addition, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. When the right reel stop control table is created in the normal game state and only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is elected, at least one of the reels has already stopped. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created when the right reel is still rotating, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols described above for the specific area number are used. The number of draws to be specified is determined, whereas in the normal gaming state, when no role is won and at least one of the reels is already The stop control table for the right reel, which is created when the right reel is still rotating, shows the “replay cherry cherry” of the 9th to 12th symbols for the specific area number described above. The number of frames for which the display result other than “Blue 7” is specified is determined. For this reason, when a bonus or one ball (1) and one ball (2) are won, a display operation that constitutes a chance eye is performed by stopping the right reel at the timing of a specific area number. In contrast, if no winning combination is won, even if the right reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  Next, the symbol arrangement on the left reel will be described with reference to FIG. 8. The 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (1), the regular bonus, and one ball (2) is the upper stage of the left reel, Display modes (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stop at either the middle or lower level, the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one ball (1) Nos. 16 and 18 The display mode (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) in which the “Blue 7” symbol of the number stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel Each is arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 9 to 13) in which the 9th “red 7” symbol can be drawn on up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line, You can draw the 16th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line, or you can draw the 18th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be played, the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line I can't do that either. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. The Big Bonus (1), Regular Bonus (1), 1 ball (1 ball) in the position where the “Red 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing of the range that can be pulled in Since the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 2) and the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and one ball (1) are arranged respectively, the “red 7” symbol is arranged. "There is no stop operation position that can aim at the" blue 7 "symbol at the same time.

  In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line in the stop control table for the left reel created when the big bonus (2) or one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state. Created when the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames to draw the display mode to be determined and the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, 1 ball (2) are won in the normal gaming state. In the stop control table for the left reel, the “Red 7” symbol is different from the region numbers 9 to 15 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “Red 7” symbol stops on any winning line is different. This means that there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “blue 7” symbol at the same time.

  In addition, No. 6 “Cherry” symbol, which forms a combination of cherries from which more pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out than one ball (1) in the normal gaming state, is on the upper, middle or lower tier of the left reel. The display mode to stop (area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbol that constitutes a combination of one ball (1) are the upper, middle, The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) that stops at any of the lower tiers is arranged beyond the 4 frames that are the maximum pull-in range, respectively. .

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 14, a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) at which a maximum of 4 frames of “No. 6” cherry can be drawn and stopped on any winning line. If done, draw up to 4 frames of the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design and stop it on one of the winning lines, or place the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be pulled in and stopped on any of the winning lines, a maximum of 4 frames of “Cherry” symbol is displayed. It cannot be pulled in and stopped on any winning line. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. There are more pachinko balls (award) than one ball (1) in the normal gaming state at a position where the “cherry” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range that can be drawn into Since the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the combination of cherries from which the ball (ball) is paid out and the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) are arranged, the “Cherry” symbol and There is no stop operation position at which the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In other words, in the stop control table for the left reel created when the cherry is elected in the normal gaming state, the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “cherry” symbol stops on one of the winning lines is determined. In the stop control table for the left reel created when the area numbers 6 to 12 and one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the display indicating that the “blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line Since the region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames into which the mode is drawn are different are different, there is no stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  On the other hand, the display pattern (area number 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and chance chance that the “Cherry” symbol of No. 6 stops at any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel The “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are arranged within the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) in which the number of draw-in frames for drawing the 6th “cherry” symbol up to 4 frames and stopping it on any winning line is determined, and The number of draws that will stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” will be determined. Since the stop operation positions (region numbers 4 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 14) partially overlap, the stop operation positions (region numbers 6 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 12) are stopped. If an operation is made, if the cherries are won, the 6th “cherry” symbol will stop on one of the winning lines, and if one ball (1) is won, a chance will be formed "Replay watermelon bell" of No. 2-4, 8 ~ "Bell red 7 Bell" of the No. 0 pattern is to be stopped.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 41a regards that the stop operation has been performed even if the reel stop operation has not been performed when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reel rotation started. To automatically stop each reel.

  When the CPU 41a performs the automatic stop control, the CPU 41a performs control to stop with priority in the order of the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel. That is, when all the reels are rotating, control is performed to stop in the order of right, middle, and left, and when any reel has already stopped, the reels that are still rotating are set to the right, middle, Control to stop in priority order in the left order. In particular, in the present embodiment, a winning combination that is achieved only by stopping “cherry” on the winning line of the left reel, that is, a winning combination that is achieved by only one of the reels is defined. Except for the case where a reel whose role is established alone is already stopped before performing, the control for stopping the reel at the end is performed.

  In addition, the automatic stop control refers to the stop control table of the corresponding reel, as with the case where the stop operation is performed, except for the reel that stops last, and responds based on the number of frames drawn in the referenced stop control table. Control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For the reels that will stop at the end, specify the number of draws that cannot be used on any winning line in the draw range of up to 4 symbols, that is, 5 frames, and based on the smallest draw number Control to stop. If “Cherry” is already stopped on the winning line on the left reel, the number of draws in which no other combination is on any of the pay lines is specified, and the number of draws that are the smallest is based on that number. Control to stop.

  Further, once the automatic stop control is started, the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is invalidated and is not validated until all the reels are stopped thereafter.

  As described above, when the reels are stopped by the automatic stop control, the winning combination is controlled so that the winning combination is not aligned on any winning line regardless of whether or not any winning combination is won in the internal lottery. The Rukoto. In addition, for the reel that stops last, stop control is not performed based on the stop control table, but based on the smallest number of drawn frames that do not have any combination on the winning line, the reel is controlled to stop. Therefore, the reach eyes or chance eyes may stop, but in this case, the stopped reach eyes or chance eyes become invalid. In other words, even if the reach is stopped, if it is based on automatic stop control, it does not indicate that any special role is elected, and even if the chance is stopped, it is based on automatic stop control. If so, it does not indicate that there is a high possibility that any special role will be elected.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out, the total number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out during the big bonus, etc. Work. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that has been corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 starts from the four at the end of one game when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, and at the time of activation. When the initialization condition is satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the use of the storage area of the RAM 41c is used. All areas except the middle stack area (including unused areas and unused stack areas) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  Next, an external output signal output from the slot machine 1 to an external device will be described. The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 pays out in response to the occurrence of a regular bonus, an RB signal indicating a big bonus, a BB signal indicating a big bonus, a ball IN signal indicating the number of pachinko balls used for setting a bet, and a winning. Output control is performed to output a ball OUT signal indicating the number of pachinko balls (awarded ball number) as an external output signal. As shown in FIG. 15, the game control board 40 can be connected to an external device via the external output board 300, and an external output signal output by the output control of the CPU 41 a is connected to the external output board 300. Output to external devices.

  FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing the output status of the RB signal and BB signal when the big bonus occurs.

  When the big bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting the BB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the big bonus that starts the output of the RB signal with the occurrence of the regular bonus (from OFF to ON state), the transition to the regular bonus is repeated until the end condition is satisfied, so it is always controlled to the regular bonus. However, as shown in FIG. 16, when the regular bonus is once ended and the next regular bonus starts, the CPU 41a stops outputting the RB signal indicating the occurrence of the regular bonus to be ended ( When the output waiting time tw elapses, the output is started again (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the big bonus is established and the regular bonus ends with this, the output of the RB signal is stopped (from the ON state to the OFF state), and then the output of the BB signal is also stopped (ON) To OFF state).

  Thus, when the regular bonus ends during the big bonus and the regular bonus starts again, the output of the RB signal is stopped for the output waiting time tw, and then the output is started again. It is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has input the RB signal. Note that the output waiting time tw may be a time longer than the time at which it is possible to determine that the signal has been interrupted by the external device.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a setting start command, and an initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify that the bet number has been set, and is transmitted when a pachinko ball is taken in and the bet number is set.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of a winning, the type of winning, and the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) to be paid out at the time of winning. The

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of pachinko balls, and is transmitted when payout of the pachinko balls is started by winning or paying out the already-acquired balls. The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of the pachinko ball, and is transmitted when the payout of the pachinko ball is completed by winning and paying out the already-acquired ball.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in a start-up process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (A) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the effect control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 receives the command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55 and the like are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the type of command, the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during the execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table also includes specific commands (reel stop command indicating automatic stop, winning determination command indicating occurrence of winning, payout start command, payout end, gaming state command indicating big bonus end, standby command, stop Command, error command, setting start command, initialization command, etc.) are stored, and the CPU 91a is set in the game when receiving these specific commands. Regardless of the effect pattern being performed, a specific control pattern corresponding to the command is referred to, and the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a reel stop command for the reel to be stopped last is received among the reel stop commands indicating automatic stop, the reel is stopped by automatic stop control. An automatic stop notification pattern for notifying that the reach is invalid and that a small role notification effect described later is invalid is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. If a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. When the payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect that is being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, the other effects and the effects accompanying the payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. In addition, as will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed, and the state (for example, the final screen on the liquid crystal display 51) when the progress stage ends. Is displayed, and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the standby pattern described above is referred to as the control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  The CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 is for RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (effect) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  In addition, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 continuously executes over a plurality of games in the normal gaming state, and finally executes a continuous effect that notifies whether or not the bonus is won.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of continuous production.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the CPU 91a continuously determines whether to execute a continuous effect according to the result of the internal lottery every time an internal winning command is received in the normal gaming state, that is, every time the internal lottery is performed. When the production lottery is executed and the continuous production lottery is won, one continuous production pattern is selected from a plurality of continuous production patterns according to the result of the internal lottery, and the continuous production is performed based on the selected continuous production pattern. Execute. On the other hand, even if the continuous production lottery is not won, if the chance is stopped, one continuous production pattern is selected from a plurality of continuous production patterns according to the result of the internal lottery of the game and selected. A continuous effect is executed based on the continuous effect pattern.

  In addition, when the chance eyes are stopped during the execution of the continuous performance, the chance eyes are invalidated, and the continuous performance is not newly executed. Further, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and if the bonus is announced, the continuous effect lottery is not performed thereafter. That is, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and when the bonus is announced, the continuous effect is not further executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous performance is executed when the chance is derived in the normal gaming state. In addition, the continuous effect lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and the continuous effect is also executed when the continuous effect lottery is won. That is, in the normal gaming state, even if the chance is not derived, if the continuous production lottery is won, the continuous production is executed.

  Further, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 performs an effect indicating that the general role is won, that is, a so-called small role notification effect when either the general role or the special role is won in the normal gaming state. It is supposed to be. Specifically, when an effect pattern for executing the small role notification effect is selected according to the result of the internal lottery, the small role notification effect is executed according to the control pattern.

  And, since the small role notification effect is performed, it is notified that either the general role or the special role is elected, so even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the notified general role, If not, the special role will be elected, so a small role announcement effect will be performed, and if the reported general role is not prepared except when it is missed, it will be informed that the special role is elected. The Rukoto.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. The reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the game control unit 41 is stagnant. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), the state of the stop switch 36 is acquired, and a specific register of the CPU 41a is acquired. The valid / invalid of the stop function is set in (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption. In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, so an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 19, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is confirmed, it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sb3), and the error code indicates an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error. In this case, after initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5), and the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. If the operation is not detected, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected.

  If an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb6), and the display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is stacked in the step Sb1. (Sb7) to return to the original processing.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. If error processing is performed, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 18, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 20, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18).

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 20, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is read out (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sc7). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 18, and the process proceeds to game processing.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether or not the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to an abnormal error process. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a prize ball giving process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are executed in order. When the game end process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start switch 7 is operated is executed. .

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player is detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the prize ball granting process in step Sd5, when it is determined in step Sd4 that a prize has been generated, a process of requesting the payout of the number of pachinko balls given in accordance with the prize is performed.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of betting numbers determined according to the gaming state. In the regular bonus, 1 is set. In the normal gaming state, 3 is set.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and a replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not it is played (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a specified number (Se5). If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to Step Se4, and if the value of the BET counter is the specified number, the process proceeds to Step Se6.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, the process proceeds to step Se6. In the step of Se6, the setting before waiting for capture is performed and then the process proceeds to the step of Se7. In the setting before waiting for taking-in, the detection of the one-ball taking-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In the step of Se7, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se7, the process proceeds to the step of Se10, and if the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se8).

  If the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number in the step of Se8, the process returns to the step of Se6, and if the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number, the setting at the start of the game is performed (Se9). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se9, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of the number of bets based on the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the settlement of the already-taken balls based on the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is stored in the upper plate 26. Returning the pachinko ball to the lower plate 25 of the pachinko ball and the pachinko ball in the capture device 100 to be described later is prohibited. Since the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, setting of the bet number is prohibited until the BET process of the next game. Further, since the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing, the settlement of the captured balls until the next game BET processing, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26, and a later-described one. Returning the pachinko ball in the take-in device 100 to the lower plate 25 is prohibited.

  In step Se10, it is determined whether or not an operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 has been detected. If the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se10, the process proceeds to the step of Se15, and if the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c. , It is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se11). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se11, the process returns to the step of Se6. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 After invalidating the detection of the operation (Se12), the value of the fetched ball counter set in the RAM 41c (the counter that stores the number of fetched balls that has not been fetched among the number of balls to be fetched) is set to 1. (Se13), and the process proceeds to the capture control process shown in FIG. 25 (Se14). Then, when the capture control process in the Se14 step is completed, the process returns to the Se6 step. For this reason, when the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 is detected and the process proceeds to the take-in control process, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the checkout switch 10, and the start switch 7 The detection of the operation is invalidated, the number of bets is set, the paid-in ball is settled, the pachinko ball stored in the upper plate 26 and returned to the lower plate 25 of the pachinko ball in the take-in device 100 described later, the game Will be prohibited from starting.

  In step Se15, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se15, the process proceeds to the step of Se20, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se16). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se16, the process returns to the step of Se6. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 After invalidating the operation detection (Se17), the value of the take-in ball counter is set to (specified number × 5-BET counter value × 5-unused ball counter (this is a counter set in the RAM 41c and has already been taken in). The value is updated (Se18) to the take-in control process shown in FIG. 25 (Se19). Then, when the capture control process in the Se19 step ends, the process returns to the Se6 step. For this reason, when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected and the process shifts to the capture control process, the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is detected until the process is completed. Is invalidated, the number of bets is set, the paid-in ball is settled, the pachinko ball stored in the upper plate 26 and returned to the lower plate 25 of the pachinko ball in the take-in device 100 described later, and the game is started. It will be prohibited.

  In step Se20, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se6, and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se21), and if the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se6. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se21, after the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated (Se22), the settlement control shown in FIG. When the process proceeds (Se23) and the settlement control process ends, the process returns to the step Se6. For this reason, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, and when the process proceeds to the settlement control process, the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10 and the start switch 7 is detected until the process is completed. Invalidation, setting of the number of bets, settlement of already-acquired balls, pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26, return to the lower plate 25 of pachinko balls in the capture device 100 described later, and start of the game are prohibited Will be.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement control process executed by the CPU 41a in step Se23 in FIG.

  In the settlement control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the unused ball counter is 0 (Se101). If the value of the unused ball counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 ( Se102).

  If either the value of the unused ball counter or the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the steps of Se101 and Se102, an unsettled ball counter (a counter set in the RAM 41c, The value of (the counter that stores unsettled spheres that have not been paid out yet) is set to the value of (unused sphere counter value + BET counter value × 5), that is, the number of unused spheres and the used spheres. The total value with the number is updated (Se103), and the values of the unused ball counter and the BET counter are cleared (Se104). Then, the process proceeds to a payment request process for requesting payment of the pachinko ball for the value of the unsettled ball counter to the payout control board 60 (Se105). When the payment request process is completed, the payment control process is terminated as it is. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the unused ball counter value and the BET counter value are both 0 in the steps of Se101 and Se102, whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, that is, the return ball in the return ball guide passage 109 is detected. (Se106), and if the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected, that is, in the payout ball guiding passage 208. It is determined whether or not the payout ball is clogged (Se107). If the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected in the step of Se106 or if the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected in the step of Se107, the settlement control process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If neither the return ball clogging detection switch 111 nor the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected in the steps of Se106 and Se107, the rotational drive amount of the take-in motor 101 is set to 100 balls (Se108), and the sorting solenoid is set. 102 is turned on (Se119), and the flow direction of the taken pachinko sphere is set to the return ball guiding passage 109 side.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is the return ball guiding path 109 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is on (Se110). If the actual flow path direction is on the return ball guiding passage 109 side, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned on and the take-in operation is started (Se111). That is, based on the detection state of the flow path detection switch 115 that detects the flow path direction of the flow path switching valve 107, the drive of the take-in motor 101 is performed on the condition that the actual flow path direction faces the return ball guide path 109 side. To start.

  While the intake motor 101 is being driven, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the return ball guiding path 109 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is on (Se112). ) If the flow path direction is on the return ball guide passage 109 side, it is determined whether or not a drive stop condition for the take-in motor 101 is satisfied (Se113 to Se116). Specifically, in the step of Se113, the detection status of the capture ball detection switch 105 is checked, and whether or not the capture ball has been detected for a specified time (for example, 3 seconds) since the last capture ball is detected. It is determined whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected in the step of Se114, that is, whether or not the return ball is clogged in the return ball guiding passage 109, and in the step of Se115, the payout ball is clogged. It is determined whether or not the detection switch 112 is detected, that is, whether or not the payout ball is clogged in the payout ball guide passage 208, and in the step of Se116, the rotation for the rotation drive amount, that is, the rotation for 100 balls is completed. Determine whether or not.

  If none of the drive stop conditions for the take-in motor 101 is satisfied in steps Se113 to Se116, the process returns to step Se112. Further, when any one of the drive conditions of the take-in motor 101 is established in the steps of Se113 to Se116, that is, when the take-in ball has not been detected for a specified time since the last take-in ball was detected. When the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, when the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected or when rotation for 100 balls is completed, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off ( Se117) After the processing (Se118) of setting the flow direction of the pachinko sphere taken in with the sorting solenoid 102 turned off to the side of the taking-in ball guiding passage 108 (Se118), the settlement control processing is terminated, and the flowchart of FIG. Return to.

  Further, when the flow path direction is not on the return ball guiding passage 109 side in the step of Se110 or Se112, that is, the flow switching valve is switched to the return ball guiding passage 109 side with the sorting solenoid 102 turned on. When the flow direction by 107 is not switched to the return ball guide passage 109 side, or while the take-in motor 101 is being driven, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the on state, and the flow direction is at the return ball guide passage 109 side. In spite of the fact, if the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off (Se119), and the sorting solenoid 102 is turned off. (Se120), and after setting an error code indicating a channel direction error indicating a channel direction error in the register (Se12) ). The process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 19 (Se122). Then, when the error state is canceled and the error process is finished, the settlement control process is finished, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the capture control process executed by the CPU 41a in step Se14.

  In the take-in control process, first, 3 is set in the retry counter set in the RAM 41c (a counter for storing the retry count of the take-in operation) (Se301), and the take-in motor 101 corresponding to the value of the take-in ball counter is set. , That is, the rotational drive amount necessary to capture the number of spheres set in the capture ball counter is set (Se302). In this state, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is in a state facing the intake ball guiding path 108 side.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the intake ball guiding path 108 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is in an off state (Se303). If the actual flow path direction is based on the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side, the take-in motor 101 is set to on and the take-in operation is started (Se304). That is, based on the detection state of the flow path detection switch 115 that detects the flow path direction of the flow path switching valve 107, the condition of the intake motor 101 is determined on the condition that the actual flow path direction faces the intake ball guide passage 108 side. Start driving.

  While the intake motor 101 is being driven, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the intake ball guiding path 108 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is in an off state ( Se305) If the flow path direction is on the side of the take-in ball guide passage 108, the detection status of the take-in ball detection switch 105 is checked to determine whether or not a take-in ball has been detected (Se306).

  When the captured ball is detected in the step of Se306, the value of the captured ball counter is decremented by 1, and the value of the unused ball counter is incremented by 1 (Se307). At this time, the number of captured balls displayed on the captured / paid-in ball display 11 is also incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the unused ball counter is 5, that is, whether or not the number of balls necessary to set the bet number is 1 (Se308). If the value of the unused ball counter is less than 5, Se305 is determined. Return to the step. If the value of the unused sphere counter is 5 in the step of Se308, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 and the value of the unused sphere counter is cleared (Se309), and the process returns to the step of Se305.

  Further, if the take-in ball is not detected in the step of Se306, it is determined whether or not the take-in motor 101 is on, that is, whether or not the take-in motor 101 is still being driven (Se310). If 101 is on, it is determined whether or not the rotation for the rotation drive amount, that is, the value of the take-in ball counter has ended (Se311). If the rotation for the rotation drive amount has not ended, the process proceeds to Se305. Returning to the step, if the rotation for the rotational drive amount has been completed, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off (Se312), and the process returns to the step of Se305.

  If the take-in motor 101 is not on in the step of Se310, the take-in motor 101 is turned off, and the pachinko ball taken in by the rotation of the take-in motor 101 is detected by the take-in ball detection switch 105. It is determined whether or not a detection waiting time which is a time required until the detection waiting time has elapsed (Se313), and if the detection waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to the step of Se305.

  If the detection waiting time has elapsed in the step of Se313, whether or not the value of the take-in ball counter is 0, that is, the number of balls requested by the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is taken in. If the value of the take-in ball counter is not 0, that is, if the number of balls requested by the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 has not been taken in, It is determined whether or not the value of the retry counter is 0, that is, whether or not the capturing operation for capturing the shortage of pachinko balls has been performed for the number of retries (Se315). If the value of the retry counter is not 0, The value of the retry counter is decremented by 1 (Se316), and the process returns to the step of Se302.

  If the value of the take-in ball counter is 0 in the step of Se314, the retry counter value is cleared (Se317), the take-in control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the value of the retry counter is 0 in the step of Se315, the value of the take-in ball counter is cleared (Se318), the take-in control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Further, in the step of Se303 or Se306, when the flow path direction is not on the intake ball guide passage 108 side, that is, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path direction is on the intake ball guide passage 108 side. In spite of this, when the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the return ball guide passage 109 or when the take-in motor 101 is driven, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path If the direction of the flow path by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the return ball guide path 109 side even though the direction is the intake ball guide path 108 side, the setting of the intake motor 101 is set to off ( Se319) After clearing the values of the retry counter and the take-in ball counter (Se320), register an error code indicating an abnormal flow direction error indicating an abnormal flow direction. Set to (Se321), the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. 19 (Se322), the error state is canceled, the error processing is completed, and ends the capture control processing, returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 23.

  As described above, in the BET process, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effectively detected, the process proceeds to the settlement control process, and when the number of bets of 1 or more has already been set or the value of the unused ball counter is not 0. In this case, that is, when the taken-in ball remains, a settlement request is performed, and a settlement request process for returning the captured ball to the player is performed based on the settlement request, and then the settlement control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of bets is not set and the value of the unused ball counter is 0, the flow direction of the pachinko ball taken in by the take-in device 100 is set to the return ball guide passage 109 side. After the take-in motor 101 is driven in the state, control for returning the pachinko balls in the take-in device 100 is performed, and then the settlement control process is terminated.

  Further, when the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 is detected effectively, 1 is set in the take-in ball counter and the process proceeds to the take-in control process. Every time the take-in operation of the take-in operation for taking in the ball is performed, or the value of the take-in ball counter subtracted by the take-in ball detection by the take-in ball detection switch 105 becomes 0 or the take-in operation is performed once. The process is repeated until the value of the retry counter to be subtracted becomes 0, or any one of the conditions is satisfied, and when one of the conditions is satisfied, the capture control process is terminated.

  When the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected effectively, the number of used balls (the value of the BET counter × the number of balls used to set a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state (15 balls)) 5) and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of unused balls (the value of the unused ball counter), that is, the number of balls necessary to set the specified number of bets at that time is set in the take-in ball counter and loaded. The process shifts to control processing, and the value of the take-in ball counter obtained by subtracting the take-in operation for taking in the pachinko balls corresponding to the value of the take-in ball counter by detecting the take-in ball with the take-in ball detection switch 105 is 0. Or the value of the retry counter that is subtracted every time the capture operation is performed is repeated until either of the conditions is met, and the capture is performed when either of the conditions is met. The control process ends.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a prescribed number of bets predetermined according to the game state of the game is read (Sg1), and the process proceeds to step Sg2. The specified number of bets is 3 in the normal gaming state and 1 in the regular bonus gaming state.

  In the step of Sg2, it is determined whether or not the bet number set in the game, that is, the value of the BET counter is the specified number read in the step of Sg1, and if the set bet number is the specified number, Sg3 If the set number of bets is not the specified number, the process proceeds to Sg4.

  In step Sg3, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the set value is in the range of 1-6, the process proceeds to step Sg5, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In step Sg4, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in a register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing is performed. In the random number acquisition process, as shown in FIG. 27, first, interrupts are prohibited (Sg21). Next, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the value of the latched random number is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. The random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR (Sg22).

  Next, the lower byte value and upper byte value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41GR are exchanged with each other using the register for circle calculation (Sg23). Next, the value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41GR is ORed with 8080h (Sg24). Further, the upper byte (15th to 8th bits) is shifted downward by 1 bit, and 1 is inserted into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR is acquired as a random number for internal lottery (Sf25). Then, after permitting the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sg21 (Sg26), the random number acquisition process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 26, when the random number acquisition process is completed, the process proceeds to step Sg6, the state number (any one of 0 to 2) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to step Sg7. In the step of Sg7, in the gaming state indicated by the state number, the first combination number to be drawn is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg8. In the step of Sg7, when the state number is 0, that is, when any special combination is not carried over in the normal gaming state, 1 (big bonus (1)) is first set as the combination number to be drawn. When the state number is 1, that is, when any special combination is carried over in the normal game state, 10 (replay) is first set as the combination number to be drawn, and the state number is 2. That is, in the case of a regular bonus, 11 (cherry) is first set as the winning number to be drawn.

  In the step of Sg8, it is confirmed whether or not the lot number to be drawn is 15, that is, whether or not all the lots to be drawn are finished, and if it is 15, that is, all the lots to be drawn. If the lottery for the second part has been completed, the process proceeds to step Sg9. If not 15, the process proceeds to step Sg10.

  In step Sg9, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sg10, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 9B is 1 in association with the role number to be processed. If not 1, the process proceeds to step Sg12.

  In the step of Sg11, the address (see FIG. 10) of the storage area of the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 9B in association with the processing target role number is read. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg12, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 9B in association with the processing target role number and the read setting value. Read the address of the storage area for the number of judgment values. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg13, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg11 or Sg12 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is set as a new random number value, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg14. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg16. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sg15.

  In step Sg15, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg8.

  In the step of Sg16, it is confirmed whether or not the combination number is 1 to 9, that is, a combination number indicating a special combination or a combination including a special combination. If the combination number is 1 to 9, the step of Sg17 is performed. If the combination number is not 1 to 9, the process proceeds to step Sg18.

  In the step of Sg17, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the step of Sg18, the general combination storing work of the RAM 41c is set. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step of Sg18, when the combination numbers are 1 to 3, since the general combination is not won, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared in this case.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in the step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si1 step, a new wait time is set (Si2).

  Next, after setting the automatic stop time (Si3), the reel motor is set to start rotating, and the reel starts rotating (Si4). Then, the process proceeds to step Si5, the table creation data is identified by referring to the table index, and based on the identified table creation data, the game state of the game, the winning status of the combination, the stop status of other reels A stop control table corresponding to is prepared for each rotating reel, and the process proceeds to step Si6, a stop preparation completion code indicating that the preparation for stop is completed is set, and the process further proceeds to step Si7. In the process at the time of passing the origin in the process (A), the process waits until a constant speed rotation of the reel is detected.

  If it is determined that the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected in the step of Si7, the process proceeds to the step of Si8, it is determined whether or not the automatic stop flag indicating that automatic stop control is being performed is set in the RAM 41c, and the automatic stop flag is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step Si9, the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated, and the process proceeds to step Si12. On the other hand, if the automatic stop flag is set in the Si8 step, the process proceeds to the Si10 step without enabling the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  In the step of Si10, it is determined whether or not the automatic stop flag is set. If the automatic stop flag is set, the process proceeds to the step of Si11 to perform the automatic stop control, and the automatic stop flag must be set. If so, go to the step of Si16.

  In the Si11 step, it is determined whether or not the right reel is rotating. If the right reel is not rotating, the process proceeds to the Si12 step, and it is further determined whether or not the middle reel is rotating.

  If the right reel is rotating in the step of Si11, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps as the stop operation position) of the reel motor corresponding to the right reel is acquired, and the reel corresponds to the right reel. After setting the workpiece, the process proceeds to step Si29 and waits until the rotation of the right reel stops.

  If the middle reel is rotating in the step of Si12, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) of the reel motor corresponding to the middle reel is acquired, and the middle reel corresponds to the middle reel. After setting the workpiece, the process proceeds to step Si29 and waits until the rotation of the middle reel stops.

  If the middle reel is not rotating in the step of Si12, that is, if the left reel is rotating, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time of the reel motor corresponding to the left reel (the number of steps as the stop operation position) Is obtained and set to the work corresponding to the left reel, the process proceeds to step Si29 and waits until the rotation of the left reel stops.

  Then, when the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped in the step of Si29, the process proceeds to the step of Si30, and it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped. If all the reels are not stopped, the process returns to the step of Si5. If the reel is stopped, the process proceeds to step Si31. If the automatic stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is cleared, and then the reel rotation process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the Si16 step, it is determined whether or not the automatic stop time set in the Si3 step has elapsed. If the automatic stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the Si17 step. Proceed to step.

  In the Si17 step, an automatic stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, the process proceeds to the Si18 step, the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is invalidated, and the process returns to the Si10 step.

  In the step of Si19, it is determined whether or not the operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. If any operation of the stop switch is not detected, the process proceeds to the step of Si20. If operation of the stop switch is detected, the process proceeds to step Si27.

  In the step of Si20, it is determined whether or not a reel rotation error (error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 for a certain period or more) has occurred. If no reel rotation error has occurred, Si21 is detected. If a reel rotation error has occurred, the process proceeds to step Si25.

  In the step of Si21, it is determined whether or not a capture error (error determined when the capture of the pachinko sphere is detected outside the period during which the capture of the pachinko sphere is permitted) has occurred. If no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step Si22, and if an acquisition error has occurred, the process proceeds to step Si23.

  In the step of Si22, it is determined whether or not a payout error (error determined when the payout of the pachinko ball (prize ball) is detected outside the period during which the payout of the pachinko ball (prize ball) is permitted) has occurred. If the payout error has not occurred, the process returns to the Si10 step, and if the payout error has occurred, the process proceeds to the Si23 step.

  In the step of Si23, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register, the process proceeds to the step of Si22, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si10 step again.

  In the step of Si25, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register, the process proceeds to the step of Si27, and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si3 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  In the step of Si27, the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is invalidated and the process proceeds to the step of Si28, and the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch detected in the step of Si19 is moved from the reel reference position at that time. After acquiring the number of steps (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) and setting the work corresponding to the stop reel, the process proceeds to step Si29 and waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops.

  When the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped in the step of Si29, the process proceeds to the step of Si30 described above, and it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped. If all the reels are not stopped, the process returns to the step of Si5. If all the reels are stopped, the process proceeds to the step of Si31. If the automatic stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is cleared, and then the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  In the winning determination process, first, a stop symbol is referred to for each winning line (Sj1), and it is determined whether or not a combination corresponding to the gaming state is prepared (Sj2). If the combination corresponding to the gaming state is not complete in step Sj2, the process proceeds to Sj4. If the combination corresponding to the gaming state is aligned in step Sj2, a winning flag indicating the type of the combined combination is displayed. The RAM 41c is set (Sj3), and the process proceeds to step Sj4.

  In step Sj4, it is determined whether or not there is a winning line for which the winning determination has not been completed. If there is a winning line for which the winning determination has not been completed, the process returns to step Sj1 for the unprocessed winning line. If there is no winning line for which the determination of winning is not completed, the process proceeds to step Sj5.

  In step Sj5, it is determined whether or not a combination corresponding to the gaming state is arranged on the winning line based on whether or not a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the combination corresponding to the gaming state is not on the winning line in step Sj5, the winning determination process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step Sj5, when the combination corresponding to the game state is arranged on the winning line, it is determined whether or not the combination indicated by the winning flag is replay (Sj6), and when the combination indicated by the winning flag is replay. Then, the replay game flag indicating the replay game is set in the RAM 41c (Sj7), the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag is not replayed in step Sj6, the number of winning balls corresponding to the gaming state (state number) of the game and the winning combination indicated by the winning flag is referred to by referring to the role-specific table shown in FIG. Is set (Sj8), and the process proceeds to step Sj9.

  In step Sj9, it is determined whether the combination indicated by the winning flag is the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2). If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag in step Sj9 is neither the big bonus (1) nor the big bonus (2), the process proceeds to step Sj12, and the winning combination indicated by the winning flag in step Sj9 is the big bonus (1) or big bonus ( 2), the big bonus medium flag indicating that the big bonus is in the RAM 41c is set, and the special role storing work of the RAM 41c is cleared to clear the winning flag for the special role (Sj10). The value of the big bonus medium payout counter in which the total number of payouts of pachinko balls (prize balls) is stored is initialized (set to 0) (Sj11), and the process proceeds to step Sj12.

  In step Sj12, it is determined whether or not the combination indicated by the winning flag is a regular bonus. If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag is not a regular bonus in the step Sj12, the process proceeds to the step Sj15. Is set in the RAM 41c, the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared to clear the winning flag for the special role (Sj13), and the number of regular bonus games is stored in the RAM 41c. The value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus game winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus are stored are initialized (the regular bonus game number counter value is set to 12, Over to clear the value of the winning counter in the bonus), and then (Sj14), the process proceeds to step of Sj15.

  In step Sj15, if the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is cleared. Then, the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk1). If the regular bonus flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sk5. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the regular bonus game number counter, and if a win has occurred, 1 is added to the value of the regular bonus medium prize counter (Sk2). It is determined whether or not a bonus ending condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter is 8 (Sk3). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step of Sk3, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the end condition of the regular bonus is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk4). ), Go to step Sk5.

  In step Sk5, it is determined whether or not the big bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in step Sk5, the process proceeds to step Sk12. If the big bonus medium flag is set, the value of the big bonus medium payout counter is set to the pachinko ball (prize ball) of the game. Are added (Sk6), and it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the payout counter during the big bonus has reached 2326 balls (Sk7). If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sk7, the process proceeds to step Sk9. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are set. Clear (Sk8) and proceed to Step Sk12.

  In step Sk9, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk9, the process proceeds to the step of Sk12. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk9, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sk10), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus medium win counter that stores the number of wins in the regular bonus are initialized. (Sk11), the process proceeds to step Sk12.

  In step Sk12, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sk12, the process proceeds to step Sk16. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk13). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk13, that is, when the regular bonus is ended and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk13, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk14). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14, that is, when the regular bonus is restarted during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition for the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk16. In the step of Sk15, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to the step of Sk16.

  In the step of Sk16, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in the step of Sk16, the process proceeds to the step of Sk19. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk16, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk17), and the process waits until the output waiting time of the RB signal (tw in FIG. 16) elapses (Sk18). move on.

  In step Sk19, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk19, the process proceeds to the step of Sk24. If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk19, whether or not the BB medium signal of the external output signals is ON. Is determined (Sk20). When the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk20, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk24, and the BB is being processed in the step of Sk20 If the signal is not ON, that is, if the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal of the external output signals is turned ON (Sk21), and the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect is stored in the register. An effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk22 elapses is set (Sk22) (Sk23). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sk24.

  In step Sk24, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sk24, the process proceeds to the step of Sk27. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk24, whether the RB signal in the external output signal is ON or not. Is determined (Sk25). When the RB signal is ON in the step of Sk25, that is, when the regular bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the regular bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk27, and the RB is being processed in the step of Sk25. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk26), and the process proceeds to Sk27.

  In the step of Sk27, it is determined whether or not the BB signal is on in the external output signal. If the BB medium signal is not ON in the step of Sk27, the process proceeds to the step of Sk39. If the BB medium signal is in the ON state of the Sk27 step, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sk28). When the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk28, that is, when the big bonus does not end, the process proceeds to the step of Sk39, and when the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk28, that is, the big bonus is When the process ends, the BB signal in the external output signal is turned off (Sk29), the stage waiting time for the ending stage is set in the register (Sk30), and the stage waiting time set in the step of Sk30 has elapsed. An effect waiting process is performed to wait until it is performed (Sk31). After completion of the effect waiting process in the step of Sk31, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sk32), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sk33.

  In step Sk33, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is set to be invalid in the step of Sk33, the process proceeds to step Sk39. If the stop function is set to be valid in the step of Sk33, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. Then, the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sk35). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sk36). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, the process returns to the step of Sk36. When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sk36, the process proceeds to the step of Sk37.

  In step Sk37, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared (Sk38), and it progresses to the step of Sk39.

  In step Sk39, initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, and then the process at the end of the game ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is inactive during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not in operation during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is not determined. It is determined whether or not the bonus is not activated. If the bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB medium signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (A) executed by the CPU 41a by interrupting the start process or the game process in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, at an interval of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (A), first, interrupts are prohibited (Sn1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (A) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sn2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (A) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sn3). In the step of Sn3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (A) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sn4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sn8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sn23 described later is executed (Sn5).

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether it is 1 or not, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sn6). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, if it is timer interrupt 1, then the reel motor Reel starting process (Sn7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step process (Sn8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, a motor phase signal standby process (Sn9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a lapse of a certain time, and an acquisition motor control process (Sn10) for updating the rotational drive amount of the acquisition motor 101, etc. After the sequential execution, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn22), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted. (Sn23), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sn6, LED dynamic display processing (Sn10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port, etc. (Sn11), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sn12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sn13), and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sn14) and the external output signal update processing (Sn15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn22), and the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted. (Sn23) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the step of Sn4, it is further determined by referring to the branch counter value whether it is 3 or not, that is, the timer interrupt 4 (Sn17). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, if timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sn 18) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing the origin of rotating reels 2 L, 2 C, 2 R (reel reference) (Passing position) is detected, occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected, and whether stop preparation is completed (stop preparation completion code is set) is confirmed. If it is rotating at high speed, the process at the time of passing through the origin (Sn19) that permits the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel that is rotating, based on detection signals of various switches Registers saved in the stack area in Sn2 after sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sn20) for determining whether the seed switch satisfies the detection condition and the same take-in motor control process (Sn21) as the step of Sn10 (Sn22), the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted (Sn23), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 at the step of Sn16, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position when the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is determined, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated. Stop switch process (Sn24), the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted, and when it is time to stop, stop process (Sn25) to start braking by two-phase excitation, and brake in the stop process After executing the final stop process (Sn26) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start in sequence, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn22), and interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted. (Sn23), the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop switch process executed in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above by the CPU 41a.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right, whether or not a stop operation position is set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, a stop operation has been detected or stopped by automatic stop. Is determined (Sp1, Sp2). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels, or if no stop has been instructed, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Further, in the step Sp1, if any reel stop operation is detected or if a reel stop instruction is given, automatic stop is performed based on whether or not the automatic stop flag is set in the RAM 41c. If it is not due to automatic stop, the process proceeds to step Sp5. If it is due to automatic stop, whether it is a final stop reel, that is, whether it is the reel that stops last. If it is not the final stop reel, the process proceeds to step Sp5. If it is the final stop reel, the process proceeds to step Sp7.

  In the step of Sp5, referring to the stop control table corresponding to the reel, the area number that becomes the stop position is specified from the area number including the step number of the stop operation position set for the work corresponding to the stop reel, Proceed to step Sp6, calculate the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in step Sp5, set the calculated number of steps, and then stop the stop switch process. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the step of Sp7, the number of drawn frames is set to 0, the process proceeds to the step of Sp8, and when the reel is stopped based on the currently set number of drawn frames, the winning combination is arranged on any winning line. If it is determined whether or not the combination is complete, the process proceeds to step Sp9, 1 is added to the number of frames to be drawn, and the process returns to step Sp8 again. In the step of Sp8, if the left reel is already stopped and “cherry” is stopped on any of the pay lines, are any of the winning lines other than cherries aligned? It will be determined whether or not.

  If it is determined in the Sp8 step that no winning combination is found on any winning line, the process proceeds to the Sp10 step, and the number of drawn frames set at that time and the work corresponding to the stop reel are set. The area number that is the stop position is specified from the area number that includes the number of steps of the stop operation position that is being operated, and the process proceeds to the above-described step Sp6. After calculating the number of steps required to reach the stop position, and setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 35 shows the control contents of the interruption interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interruption 2, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the interruption detection circuit 48 is input, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sq1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sq2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not input, the register saved in the stack area in Sq2 is restored (Sq4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sq1 is permitted (Sq5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sq3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sq6), and all output ports are initialized (Sq7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sq8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sq9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq10, where Sq10 is the same processing as Sq3), the processing enters a loop processing in which no processing is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the effect control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs an activation process (effect) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (production), after initializing the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, and the like (Sr1), access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sr2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sr3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sr4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sr4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, so the process proceeds to the step Sr5. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Sr5, it is determined whether or not the BB winning effect or ending effect has been executed before the power interruption. If the BB winning effect or ending effect is being executed, the BB winning effect or ending effect is executed. Has reached the final stage (Sr6). If the final stage has been reached, the final stage control pattern is set (Sr7), and then the liquid crystal display is set according to the set control pattern. The effect control process for controlling the various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Sr9), the interruption is permitted (Sr10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in the step of Sw5, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in the step of Sr6, After setting the last control pattern executed before disconnection (Sr8), the control of various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is performed according to the set control pattern. The effect control process to be performed is executed (Sr9), the interruption is permitted (Sr10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sr4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, after the RAM 91c is initialized (Sr11), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sr12). According to the set control pattern, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Sr9), and interruption is permitted (Sr10). ), Shift to loop processing.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (effect) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interruption process (effect), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (Ss1). If the command is not stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step Ss7. If the command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (Ss2), and the process proceeds to step Ss3.

  In the step of Ss3, in accordance with the received command, continuous effect processing for executing the continuous effect such as continuous effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss4.

  In the step of Ss4, when the received command is an internal winning command, it is determined whether or not an effect pattern for continuous effects is already set in the RAM 91c. If the effect pattern for continuous effects is not set, the ROM 91b is determined. An effect pattern is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the table, selecting an effect pattern at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. The selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss5.

  In step Ss5, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss6.

  In step Ss6, in accordance with the control pattern set in step Ss5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs is executed. Proceed to step.

  In step Ss7, after updating the values of various counters such as a random number counter in the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to step Ss8, where it is confirmed whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 so that the timer interrupt process (effect) is finished.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (effect) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of recovery is normal.

  38 and 39 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed by the CPU 91a in step Ss5 of the timer interrupt process (effect).

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (St1). If the received command is a setting start command, the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in step St1, it is determined whether the received command is an initialization command (St3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (St4), the above-mentioned standby pattern is set as a control pattern (St5), the control pattern setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in the step of St3, it is determined whether or not the received command is a standby command (St6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (St7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a standby command in the step of St6, it is determined whether or not the received command is a stop command (St8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of a stop state (St9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (St7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of St8, when the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (St11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state (St12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (St13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack at the time of occurrence of the error, that is, St13 is set (St15). Then, the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an error command in the step of St11, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout start command (St16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (St17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as the sub-pattern in the step of St17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  If the received command is not a payout start command in the step of St16, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout end command (St18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (St19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of St19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel is finished, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step St18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (St20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (St21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (St22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the winning determination command does not indicate a big bonus, it is further determined whether or not a winning other than the big bonus is indicated (St23). If the prize determination command indicates a prize other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning prize among the winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern to be set is set as a control pattern (St24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If no winning other than the big bonus is shown in the step of St23, the process proceeds to the step of St33.

  If the command received in the step of St20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a gaming state command (St25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to step St29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (St26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (St27). Then, if the game satisfies the big bonus end condition, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (St28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in step St27, the process proceeds to step St33.

  In step St29, it is determined whether or not the received command is a reel stop command. If the received command is not a reel stop command, the process proceeds to step St33. If the received command is a reel stop command, it is determined based on the reel stop command whether the reel is stopped by automatic stop (St30).

  If it is determined in step St30 that the reels are not stopped due to automatic stop, the process proceeds to step St33. If it is determined that the reels are stopped due to automatic stop, whether or not all reels are stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not a reel stop command corresponding to all the reels has been received (St31).

  If all the reels are not stopped in the step of St31, the process proceeds to the step of St33. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped, the reels are stopped by the automatic stop control. Even when the chance eyes are stopped, an automatic stop notification pattern for notifying that these chance eyes and reach eyes are invalid and that the small role notification effect is invalid is set as a control pattern (St32), and control is performed. The pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step St33, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, after the reel starts rotating, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effectively detected by the player before the predetermined automatic stop time elapses. Then, the display result is derived to the corresponding reel according to the setting status of the winning flag and the timing of the stop operation. In other words, winning is generated not only by setting the winning flag but also by the player's technical intervention such as operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Security of sex will be secured.

  On the other hand, if a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the reel starts rotating, if the reel is still rotating, automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop the rotating reel. That is, the time required for one game is not infinite, and even if the player is playing a game, a substantially sufficient operation rate cannot be obtained.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the start of reel rotation, if the reel is still rotating, automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop the rotating reel. However, the starting point for measuring the automatic stop time is not limited to the start of reel rotation. When the start switch 7 is operated, the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. The operation may be performed when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R disabled by the stop operation is enabled again, or when the stop operation is performed last.

  Further, when each reel is stopped by the automatic stop control, even if the winning flag of any combination is set, the display mode of losing is always derived for each reel. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the winning display mode from being derived only by the contingency element, and to ensure the suppression of shooting characteristics.

  Also, in the automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops at the end, refer to the stop control table of the corresponding reel as in the case of the stop operation, and based on the number of frames drawn in the referenced stop control table While the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to stop rotating, the reels that are stopped at the end do not have any role on any winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 symbols, that is, in the range of 5 frames. The number of frames to be drawn in is specified, and control for stopping based on the smallest number of frames to be drawn in is performed. In other words, except for the reel that stops at the end, control is performed according to the setting status of the winning flag regardless of whether stop operation is performed or automatic stop control. However, the control is performed so that the winning combination is not arranged on any winning line. For this reason, a function to perform automatic stop control is added because it is sufficient to perform control to stop the reels in a common process regardless of whether the stop operation is performed or automatic stop control is performed except for the reel to be stopped last. In addition, even if a function that always loses during automatic stop is added, the stop control of the reel is not complicated.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of automatic stop control, only the last reel to be stopped is specified with a drawing range of up to 4 symbols, that is, a drawing number that does not match any winning line in a range of 5 frames. However, the reels that are stopped based on the smallest number of drawn frames are controlled. However, the reels that are stopped last have a winning combination on any winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 symbols, that is, in the range of 5 frames. It is also possible to create a stop control table in which the number of undrawn frames is determined for each area number, and control to stop the reels based on this stop control table.

  In this embodiment, the stop control according to the winning flag is based on the stop control table according to the winning flag. However, other control methods (for example, those based on the control method) described later may be applied. Well, even when other control methods are applied in this way, control is performed according to the setting status of the winning flag regardless of whether stop operation is performed or automatic stop control other than the reel to be stopped at the end, In the case of the automatic stop control, the same effect as described above can be obtained as long as the control is performed so that only the reel to be stopped last is not aligned on any winning line.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed, the corresponding reel stop control table for all reels, i.e., referring to data in which the stop position can be specified in advance with respect to the stop operation position, Based on the number of frames drawn in the referenced stop control table, control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, control based on the table method is performed. In automatic stop control, the reels that are stopped last are stopped. As in the case where the operation is performed, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R based on the number of frames drawn in the referred stop control table with reference to the stop control table of the corresponding reel, that is, the table For reels that are controlled by the method and stop last, when the stop is instructed by automatic stop (the corresponding reel At the time when the stop operation position is stored in the workpiece, the number of draws that cannot be used on any of the winning lines in the draw range of up to 4 symbols, i.e., 5 frames, is specified, and the smallest draw Control based on the control, that is, control by a control method described later is performed. For this reason, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of stop control tables for each stop mode pattern of reels that have already stopped in order to control so that the winning combination is not aligned on any winning line at the time of automatic stop, and It is possible to control so that the winning combination is not achieved by simple control only by specifying the number of drawn frames that do not have the winning combination on any winning line.

  In this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed, all reels are controlled by the table method. In the automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops last, the table is the same as when the stop operation is performed. The reels that are stopped at the end are controlled so that they do not have any role on any winning line by the control method, but whether or not the stop operation is performed or automatic stop control is used. First, except for the reel that stops last, control is performed using the table method, and for the reel that stops last, control is performed using the control method. Controls to draw the corresponding symbol within the draw-in range so that the When the reels are stopped at the end by automatic stop, the result of the internal lottery is used. Regardless of the winning line, it may be possible to control to kick the symbol within the draw-in range so that the winning combination is not aligned. In this case, stop control for the reel that stops at the end It is not necessary to prepare a table, and it is sufficient to perform stop control with the same control method for the reel that stops last regardless of whether stop operation is performed or automatic stop control. Even if the function is added, stop control is not complicated.

  Regardless of whether a stop operation has been performed or automatic stop control, all reels are controlled by the control method, and when reels are stopped by the stop operation, all reels are controlled by internal lottery by the control method. When the reels are stopped by automatic stop, control according to the internal lottery is performed by the control method except for the last reel. Regardless of the result, the control method may be used to control the kicking of the symbol within the drawing range so that the winning combination is not aligned on any winning line, and in this case, a stop operation is performed. All reels are stopped with the same control method regardless of whether or not the automatic stop control is used. Since it is sufficient to control, even if the additional function of the always losing at the time of automatic stop, need not be complicated stop control.

  Further, in a slot machine, the ratio of the stop operation being generally performed in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel is high. This is because humans tend to recognize side-by-side symbols and the like from the left side (for example, horizontal writing is written from left to right), and this order is most easily recognized.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged in the horizontal direction, and generally there are many right-handed players and right-handed games. When a person performs an operation such as sliding the stop switches 8L, 8L, and 8R with the thumb, for example, it is easier to operate from the left to the right. It can be said that the ratio of the stop operation in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel is high after the start.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the medal insertion portion 4 is disposed on the right side of the front door as viewed from the player side, and the start switch 7 is disposed on the left side of the front door. . This is because, in general, there are many right-handed players, the medal insertion part 4 is arranged on the right side so that the medal can be inserted with the right hand, and the start switch 7 that is easier to operate than the medal insertion is arranged on the left side. Because it is. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In general slot machines, the start switch is usually arranged on the left side, and the stop operation is often performed from the left. Therefore, it can be said that after the start of the game, the percentage of stop operations in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel is high.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when automatic stop control is performed, control is performed such that the stop is preferentially performed in the order of the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel. That is, when all reels are rotating, control is performed to stop in the order of right, middle, and left.If any reel has already stopped, the reels that are still rotating are Control to stop with priority in the order of the left is performed.

  For this reason, when the automatic stop control is performed, the reels stop in a stop order different from the stop order with a high ratio generally selected unless the left reel is already stopped. When the stop control is performed, it is possible to determine to some extent whether or not the stop control is based on the automatic stop from the stop order.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the left reel is first stopped, the combination of “replay” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5. In contrast, when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5 and the winning of the bell is performed. When the left reel is first stopped when the flag is set, control is performed so that a combination of “bells” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5. When the reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, control for drawing the “bell” symbol on the pay line L1 is performed. In other words, in order to simplify stop control when stop operations are performed in a stop order other than the stop order that is generally selected, the left reel is first stopped in games where replays or bells are won. In other words, in general, when a reel having a high ratio of stopping first is stopped first, the control in which the winning combination of all the winning lines L1 to L5 can be matched, that is, the display modes are various. When the reels other than the left reel are stopped before the left reel, that is, when the reels that are generally low in the first stop ratio are stopped first, However, control that aligns only with a specific winning line among the winning lines L1 to L5, that is, control that simplifies the display mode is performed.

  In addition, when performing automatic stop control as described above, control is performed so that the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel are stopped in order, so if the bell or replay is won, the left reel Since the reels are stopped in the order of right and middle, except that is already stopped, at that time, the winning combination is controlled so that only the specific winning line among the winning lines L1 to L5 is aligned. When the automatic stop control is performed with these bells and replays selected, the middle and right reels have a bell on a specific winning line, except when the left reel is already stopped. Alternatively, a display mode in which the replay symbols are stopped and the bell or replay is not aligned on the winning line on the left reel on which the bell or replay symbol is stopped in the middle and right reels is provided.

  In this way, if automatic stop control is performed in the state where the bell or replay is elected, whether or not it is derived from the display mode with the automatic stop in the state where the bell or replay is elected Can be determined to some extent.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, reach eyes and chance eyes that are established by deriving a specific display result on the left reel are adopted, and these reach eyes and chance eyes can be established with automatic stop. However, at least when the bell or replay is elected, it can be determined to some extent whether it is derived from the display mode due to the automatic stop. Although the game is invalid, it is possible to reduce the misunderstanding of the player when the reach or chance is derived.

  In this embodiment, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, a “replay” symbol is displayed on the winning line L2 or L5. When pulling-in control is performed and the bell winning flag is set, if the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1. However, when a replay or bell wins and the reels other than the left reel are stopped first, the winning line for drawing the winning symbol is not limited to the above, and the winning symbol is The winning line to be drawn is limited to a specific predetermined winning line (multiple or singular) that is smaller than the winning line to draw the symbol of the winning combination when the left reel is first stopped. Or if the.

  Further, in this embodiment, a combination that is established only by stopping “Cherry” on the winning line of the left reel, that is, a combination that is established only by any one of the reels is determined. Except for the case where a reel whose role is established alone is already stopped before the control is performed, control for stopping the reel at the end is performed. For this reason, even when a winning combination with only one of the reels is won, when performing automatic stop control, the order in which the reels are stopped is changed, or when the left reel is not the final stop reel, the same Since there is a possibility that the roles will be aligned in spite of the automatic stop, the control for stopping the left reel is different from the control when stopping by the stop operation, or the order in which the reels are stopped is set. Since there is no need to change the automatic stop control, it is possible to make the automatic stop control always a common control. Therefore, even if a combination that is realized by only one of the reels is adopted, the reel accompanying the automatic stop is used. The stop control is not complicated.

  In the present embodiment, when the automatic stop control is started, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R from that point until at least all the reels stop (actually, they are activated in the next game). Since the detection of this operation is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to whether the derived display result is due to the stop operation by the player or due to the automatic stop. Thereby, for example, it is possible to reduce the misunderstanding of the player when the reach eyes or chance eyes are derived even though the reach eyes or chance eyes are invalid due to automatic stop. .

  Further, in this embodiment, when all reels are stopped by automatic stop, the reels are stopped by automatic stop control based on the automatic stop notification pattern. The player is informed that the chance eye or the reach eye is invalid, and the reach eye or the chance eye is derived even though the reach eye or the chance eye is invalid due to the automatic stop. Can be reliably prevented from being misunderstood.

  Also, in this embodiment, when all reels are stopped by automatic stop, the fact that the small role notification effect is invalid is notified because the reel is stopped by automatic stop control based on the automatic stop notification pattern. In the game where the small role announcement effect is executed, even if the notified general role does not win, there is a possibility that the general role won by the automatic stop may not have won. It is possible to recognize that the special role is not notified by the role announcement effect, and the role that was automatically stopped and notified in the game where the small role notification effect was executed will not win In such a case, it can be surely prevented that the player is misunderstood if the special role is won.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of stop controls in which stop positions (display results) are uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all reels are rotating in the table, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When any reel is already stopped, select a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel. The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and the gaming state, the internal winning state, the reel stop When all the conditions (and stopped positions (display results) of the stopped reels) are the same, reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Therefore, it is necessary to further select any one stop control table from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a lottery for reel control). Therefore, the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  Also, in this embodiment, at the start of reel rotation, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected for all reels, and the selected stop control table is selected. Each time the reels are controlled to stop, each time the reels stop, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stopped position of the stopped reel, that is, any one of the reels is stopped. The stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the stop positions of the stopped reels in the stopped state and the combination of the stop positions of the two stopped reels in the state where any two reels are stopped is selected and selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table. For example, any one reel When the reels that are rotating are stopped, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel are selected, and the selected stop control table is selected. And when any of the reels is stopped (when two reels are stopped), a new stop control table is not selected and all reels are rotating. You may make it perform stop control of the remaining reels according to the stop control table selected when any one reel stopped.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any reel is already stopped, it is uniquely determined with respect to the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stopped position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table provided, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state, the reel stop status and the stop for each game state The reel stop control may be performed in accordance with a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the already-reel, and in this way, the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same, Even if the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, if the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different, the Because there is a stop control table is applied, it can display the results of the reel it more versatile.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels further stops (when two reels stop), the stop control table is not newly selected and all The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops while the other reel is rotating.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the reel that has stopped last, and to perform stop control of the reel according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely determined for the spinning reel. The selected stop control table is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels are stopped, A stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the states, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop operation position of the remaining reels of the stopped reels The reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected for the spinning reel. Then, when any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position may be selected, and reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol fluctuates, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table that is defined in a specific manner, that is, different stop control tables can be selected for different number of steps within a range where one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state In the reel stop control according to the table, for example, in the case of not winning any combination (losing) in the normal gaming state, the same stop position is determined within a range of the area number in which a specific reel is determined. When the stop operation is performed, the same display result is derived. However, only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the other reels As the stop control table, a stop control table capable of deriving the display result constituting the chance eye was selected, and the same stop position was determined. When a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for another reel is selected. It is preferable.

  For example, in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing), even if the left reel is stopped at any time in the area numbered 5-8, the “watermelon” "Bell Replay" is derived, but at this time, only when a stop operation is performed in the area of area number 7, as the stop control table for the middle reel, the above-described 11 for at least one area number is described. ~ 13th symbol "Cherry Replay Cherry", 20, 21, 1st symbol "Cherry Bell Cherry" is a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined, that is, a display constituting a chance eye When a stop control table from which a result can be derived is selected and a stop operation is performed in the regions of region numbers 5, 6, and 8, any region is used as the stop control table for the middle reel. The stop control in which the number of pull-in frames for specifying “Cherry Replay Cherry” of No. 11 to 13 and No. 20, 21, No. 1 of “Cherry Bell Cherry” as described above is not defined. It is sufficient to select a table, that is, a stop control table from which the display result constituting the chance eye cannot be derived. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result of the reel from becoming monotonous when none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state (losing).

  Furthermore, in this case, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, among the area numbers in which the same stop position is determined, compared to the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. For many area numbers, it is preferable to select a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for other reels. In the case of winning any of the bonuses in, the chances are derived at a higher rate than in the case where none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state When the reel is controlled according to the table, each time the reel is stopped, the reel to be stopped is either the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, It is preferable that a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the stop position of the reel to be transmitted is transmitted to the effect control unit 91, and in this way, the CPU 91 a of the effect control unit 91 can detect when the reel is stopped. In addition, it is possible to perform different effects depending on not only the stop position of the reel but also the stop operation position.

  In particular, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the same display is displayed when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. The result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display that configures the chance as the stop control table of the other reels Select a stop control table that can derive the result, and stop other reels when a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is defined As a control table, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting an opportunity is selected, and any bonus is won in the normal gaming state. As a stop control table for other reels, the area numbers for which the same stop position is determined are larger than those in the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. When a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting a chance eye is selected, when the stop operation position satisfies the derivation condition of the chance eye when the reel stop command is received, that is, the chance eye When the stop control table from which the display result to be configured can be derived is a selected stop operation position, the ratio is higher than when other stop operation positions that do not satisfy the chance derivation condition but have the same stop position are used. Therefore, a special performance (for example, unusual stop sound, etc.) that informs the possibility of winning any special role may be performed. By doing so, the special effect is performed when the specific reel is stopped, which increases the possibility that the chance chance is finally derived as compared to the case where the special effect is not performed when the specific reel is stopped, As the special performance is performed, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the derivation of the chance and the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each range of a plurality of consecutive steps (in this embodiment, 4 steps each having one symbol change). Since the reel stop control is performed using the uniquely determined stop control table, the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop control table is used in which the number of frames to be drawn is uniquely determined for each unit of the area in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the different timing of the stop operation can be changed. The display result of the reel can be derived in such a manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery, or when only one ball (1) is won, area numbers 4 to 8 or area numbers 10 to 10 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is made at any timing within the 14 ranges, that is, when the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of 1 ball (1) cannot be pulled in even within a maximum of 4 frames, that is, 1 ball ( 1) If you cannot win a prize, if you do not win any role by internal lottery (losing), it will not be derived.・ "Watermelon Bell", 8-10 symbols "Bell Red 7 Bell" can be derived, if any bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one ball (2) In the case of selection, the timing of any of the area numbers 6 to 8 or the area numbers 17 to 21 shown in FIG. 14, that is, the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) is maximized. When a stop operation is made at a timing that can not be drawn even within the range of 4 frames, that is, when one ball (2) could not be won, and when any of the roles is not won by internal lottery (losing) It is possible to derive the “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that will not be derived. By deriving the display results constituting these chance eyes, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role is won.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery and any other combination is not won, and when only one ball (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and When only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, and 13, the symbols 2 to 4 constituting the chance eye “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” or “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as display results, but if no part is won (losing), the area number 6 Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Not derived Therefore, when a bonus is won by an internal lottery, or only one ball (1) is won and a stop operation is performed at a timing when one ball (1) cannot be won, or one ball (2) When a stop operation is performed at a timing when only one player is won and one ball (1) cannot be won, the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. However, since it is possible to derive the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived, the display result that constitutes the chance eye is derived, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus. be able to.

  In addition, if any combination is not won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal time, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, and any bonus by internal lottery Except for the case where is won, one ball (1) or one ball (2) can win the chance to be derived. For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, the stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even when reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In this embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a display result constituting a chance eye may be derived no matter what timing the stop operation is detected. No stop control table is created. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 The “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) are not derived on any winning line for the stop operation position (area number) that is smaller than when only the ball (1) is won. Whether a display result that constitutes a chance eye derived when the stop operation is performed at the timing is specified and whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 (2) The timing when the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) is not derived on any winning line with respect to a smaller stop operation position (area number) than when only (2) is won The stop control table for specifying the display result that constitutes the chance to be derived when the stop operation is performed may be created as the stop control table for the left reel. As a result, at the timing when the bonus is won by the internal lottery, 1 ball (1) or 1 ball (2) is won, and the winning 1 ball (1) or 1 ball (2) cannot be won. When a stop operation is performed, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived This can increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel In the state that is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the reels that have already stopped, the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived if any role is not won (losing) When only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the left reel is still rotating. "Blue 7" composing a combination of one ball on the winning line of "Blue 7" composing a combination of one ball (1) on the winning line of the left reel when the "Blue 7" symbol is not stopped Although the handle is stopped, the stop operation was performed within the range where the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes a combination of one ball (1) cannot be drawn on the winning line where “Blue 7” is stopped on the left reel. Or when only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and 1 is placed on the winning line of the left reel. The “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of balls (2) is not stopped, or the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) is stopped on the winning line of the left reel. If a stop operation is performed within a range in which the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) cannot be drawn on the winning line where “Red 7” is stopped on the left reel, If you are not elected (lost) Rukoto-free, and can be led to the center reel display results that make up the chance eyes.

  In addition, if any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. Regardless of the display result of a reel that has already stopped in the state, if the winning combination has not been won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye is derived to the right reel. When only one ball (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, so that it is on the winning line of the left reel. If the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes the combination of one ball (1) has not stopped, or at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one ball (1) on the reel winning line is not stopped, and only one ball (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel If the “Red 7” symbol that forms a combination of one ball (2) on the winning line of the left reel has not stopped and the right reel is still rotating, or at least the middle reel Is already stopped, and the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one ball (2) on the winning line of the middle reel is not stopped when the right reel is still rotating. If the winning combination is not won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye can be derived to the right reel without being derived.

  That is, when one of the bonuses is won, or when one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won and one of the reels is stopped, and one ball (1) or 1 It is possible to win one ball (1) or one ball (2) when it is not possible to win the ball (2), or in a state where any one reel is stopped, When one ball (1) or one ball (2) could not be won because the stop operation was made at a timing when one ball (1) or one ball (2) combination could not be derived, Since it is possible to derive the display results that make up the chance eyes that are not derived if they are not selected (losing), the display results that make up these chance eyes are derived. The role won It is possible to increase the player's expectation for Rukoto.

  In addition, only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is selected, and the symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) or one ball (2) on the winning line of the left reel is one of the winning lines. Even if it is not stopped above, one stop (1) or one ball (on the left reel winning line) because the stop operation was performed at a timing other than the timing at which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified. Even if the symbols constituting the combination 2) do not stop on any of the winning lines and the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, the display result constituting the chance eye on the middle reel or the right reel Can be derived and the opportunity for deriving the display result constituting the chance eye is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the bonus can be effectively enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery or when only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won, one of the reels is stopped. Then, when one ball (1) or one ball (2) could not be won already, a stop operation is performed at the timing of a specific area number, so that any combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye that is not derived even if a stop operation is performed at the same timing in the absence of the state, by deriving the display result that constitutes the chance eye, It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In addition, when none of the winning combinations are won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal times, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. In any case, it is possible to derive a chance by winning one ball (1) or one ball (2) except when any bonus is won by internal lottery. For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, the stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even when reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In the present embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the chance of the stop operation is detected at any timing regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table is created in which the display result that constitutes the game is not derived. For example, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), at least one reel When the player has already stopped, he or she has won one of the bonuses in the normal gaming state, or has fewer stop operation positions (area number) than if only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won. On the other hand, a stop control table in which display results constituting a chance eye are specified may be created as a left reel stop control table. As a result, one ball (1) or one ball (2) is already in a state where a bonus has been won by internal lottery or one ball (1) or one ball (2) has been won and at least one reel is stopped. When it is not possible to generate a prize, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In this embodiment, when the display result is derived for the left reel, the chance is not established, but when the display result is derived for any two reels or all reels (all winning combinations are The chance eye is established when the display result is derived to any one of the reels. For example, 8 to A display mode that is established only by deriving the 10th symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” may be applied as an opportunity.

  In addition, for one ball (1) and one ball (2) that can be used to derive a chance when a prize cannot be won, a maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game is set. 1 (1) or 1 (2) is won by internal lottery because the prize is accompanied by paying out 15 or less (1) pachinko balls (prize balls), which is the number of pachinko balls required to Even if it is not possible to win a prize, the player will not suffer a great disadvantage, and the winning probability of one ball (1) and one ball (2) has a great influence on the payout rate of the slot machine 1. Therefore, for example, it is possible to increase the probability that the winning of one ball (1) and one ball (2) is allowed and increase the chances that the chances can be derived. A feeling can be heightened effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of pachinko balls (number of winning balls) to be paid out with the winning of one ball (1) and one ball (2) is necessary for setting the minimum number of bets for one game. Therefore, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  In this embodiment, one pachinko ball (prize ball) is paid out to the player with the winning of one ball (1) and one ball (2). The number of pachinko balls to be paid out in response to the occurrence of a special prize winning (the number of prize balls) is not limited to one, but the number of pachinko balls to be paid out in accordance with the occurrence of a specific prize winning that can derive an opportunity (prize ball) The number is preferably smaller, but the number of pachinko balls (the number of prize balls) necessary to set the maximum bet number (3 in this embodiment) that can be set for at least one game (in this embodiment) 15 balls) or less, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected. Also, for example, when the number of payout balls (the number of winning balls) differs depending on whether it stops on a plurality of winning lines like a cherry or stops on one winning line, the combination of combinations is changed to a plurality of winning lines. If the number of payout balls (the number of prize balls) at the time of stopping is equal to or less than the number of pachinko balls required to set the maximum bet number (3 in this embodiment) that can be set for one game, the slot machine 1 It is difficult to affect the payout rate.

  Also, in this embodiment, when only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won by the internal lottery, it stops at a timing when one ball (1) or one ball (2) cannot be won. The number of stop operation positions (region numbers) in which the number of drawing frames specifying the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the operation is detected is one ball (1) or one ball (2) Since the number of draw-in frames in which the display result of the symbols constituting the combination stopping on any winning line is specified is greater than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) determined, one ball (1 in the normal gaming state) ) Or in the case where only one ball (2) is elected, a display result in which the symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) or one ball (2) are stopped on any winning line is derived. Higher than 1 ball (1) The display result constituting the chance chance derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing when one ball (2) cannot be won is derived, and one ball (1) is obtained by internal lottery. Or, when only one ball (2) is elected, one ball (1) rather than the symbols constituting the combination of the one ball (1) or one ball (2) being derived on any winning line ) Or a player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus because the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one ball (2) cannot be won is more easily derived. A feeling can be heightened effectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by the internal lottery or when one ball (1) is won, either of the “blue 7” symbols is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames. If the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18 among the timings that can be stopped on the winning line of the game, it will not be derived if no winning combination is won. ˜17 symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, if the combination of 1 ball (1) is not finally arranged on the winning line, the display result that leads to the chance eye is derived. When either bonus is won by internal lottery or when one ball (2) is won, “Red 7” symbol is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and either If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 12 and 13 among the timings at which it can be stopped on the line, it will not be derived if no combination is won. No. 10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, if the combination of one ball (2) is not finally arranged on the winning line, a display result that leads to the chance eye is derived. The timing when the symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) or one ball (2) are derived on any winning line and one ball (1) or one ball (2) cannot be won Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected in is not derived, the derived display result can win one ball (1) or one ball (2). Thailand If the display result which constitutes the chances eyes stop operation in ring is derived even when it is detected, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus generation.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or only one ball (1) is won, a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18 shown in FIG. When the player is selected, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols constituting the chance chance is derived as the display result, and either bonus is won by internal lottery or only one ball (2) When the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13 shown in FIG. 14, “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the chance eye Although it is derived as a display result, in the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), even if a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18, it is 15-17. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” is not derived as a display result, and the stop operation is detected at any timing within the range of the region numbers 12 and 13 and the symbol “Bell / Red” “7 Bell” is not derived as a display result, so that a bonus is won by an internal lottery, or only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won and one ball (1) or 1 When the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the ball (2) can be won, it is derived even if the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes an unoccupied chance, a symbol constituting a combination of one ball (1) or one ball (2) is derived on any winning line, and one ball (1 ) Or one ball 2) Even if the display result that constitutes the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which it is not possible to win a prize, the derived display result is one ball (1) or one ball. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which (2) can be won, a display result that constitutes a chance to be derived can increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In this embodiment, since the common “blue 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) and the symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2), The display result of the 17th symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, the chance eye to be derived even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (1) can be won, is derived. Thus, if the big bonus (2) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing targeting the “blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the big bonus (2) on the middle reel and the right reel. It becomes possible to stop the combination of the big bonus (2) on the winning line and win the game. Similarly, as the symbols constituting the combination of one ball (2) and the symbols constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1), the common “red 7” symbol is used. Even if a stop operation is detected at the timing at which the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, one ball (2) can be won, a display result constituting a chance eye is derived. If the regular bonus or big bonus (1) is won, the stop operation will be performed at the timing aimed at the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the middle reel, and the right reel The target is the “BAR” symbol that constitutes the regular bonus combination or the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the big bonus combination. By performing the stop operation at timing, it is possible to prize is stopped in the game a combination of regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the pay line.

  In addition, a present Example is not restricted to this, For example, as a symbol which comprises the combination of 1 ball | bowl (1) and 1 ball | bowl (2), a symbol different from the symbol which comprises the combination of bonus is applied. Even in this case, the configuration symbol of one ball (1) or one ball (2) is derived on one of the winning lines, and one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won. Even if the display result that constitutes the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing that cannot be performed, the derived display result is one ball (1) or one ball (2). The display result that constitutes the chance eye including the configuration symbol of the symbol, that is, the chance eye that is derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (1) or one ball (2) can be won. Display result If so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Also in this case, the display result constituting the chance eye including the constituent symbols of one ball (1) or one ball (2) includes the symbols constituting the bonus combination, that is, one ball (1). Alternatively, it is preferable that the display configuration is such that both the constituent symbol of one ball (2) and the constituent symbol of the bonus stop on the winning line. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing when a winning can be won, a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived is derived, so that if the bonus is won, the middle reel and the right reel are also won. The bonus combination selected in the game can be stopped on the winning line to win a prize by performing a stop operation at the timing of the symbols that make up the bonus combination. The ability.

  Further, in this embodiment, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won regardless of the timing when the stop operation is detected. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing that can be executed, a stop control table is created in which a display result that constitutes a chance eye to be derived is not derived. If no combination is won in the state (losing), than if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state or only one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (1) or one ball (2) can be won with respect to a small number of stop operation positions (region numbers), a chance is derived that is derived. May be created a stop control table display result is identified as a stop control table of the left reel. As a result, when a bonus is won by internal lottery, or when one ball (1) or one ball (2) is won, one ball (1 ball (1) or 1 ball (2) is won at a higher rate than when none of the roles are won by internal lottery. 1) or 1 ball (2), even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which it is possible to win, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye to be derived. Or, when a symbol constituting a combination of one ball (2) is derived on one of the winning lines and a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one ball (1) or one ball (2) cannot be won Even when the display result constituting the chance chance to be derived is not derived, the stop operation is detected at a timing at which the derived display result can win one ball (1) or one ball (2). Place If the display results but that make up the chance eyes are derived, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the display mode (region number 14) in which the 16th “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. -16, 15-17, 16-18) and the display mode (area) in which the No. 9 “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel No. 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) are arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, respectively, and the stop operation position that can aim at the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol at the same time Since it does not exist, when one of the symbols constituting the combination of one ball (1) or the symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) is always aimed at stopping the reel, one ball (1), One of the two balls (2) can always be awarded Since it becomes impossible to perform a stop operation at a timing at which the other combination can be won, and in this case, a chance is derived, so 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2) Even if the reel stop operation is always aimed at one of the roles, it is possible to make the chance chance appear appropriately. At this time, the other one of the one ball (1) and one ball (2) Since it is impossible to determine whether the bonus has been won or whether the bonus has been won, the appearance of the bonus can be effectively enhanced by the appearance of the chance.

  In addition, one ball (1) and one ball (2) have the same winning probability, and the number of pachinko balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls) at the time of winning is also the same. 2) There is little merit of performing the stop operation of the reel by performing only one of the combinations, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness to perform the stop operation targeting one of the one ball (1) and one ball (2). Therefore, there is a high possibility that the stop operation is performed at various positions, and various display results can be obtained.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2), the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus (1) is the upper and middle stages of the left reel. , The display mode (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stops at one of the lower tiers, the combination of 1 ball (1) and the combination of big bonus (2), the 16th “blue 7 ”The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18) where the symbol stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel is arranged in excess of 4 frames, each of which is the maximum drawing range. Since there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Red 7” symbol and “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, the stop operation is aimed at the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol is derived on the winning line. Can not be made and The “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the event is derived, and the Big Bonus (1) or the Regular Bonus (1) cannot be awarded in the end. When I didn't win, I didn't know if I couldn't win 1 ball (1) or I couldn't win the big bonus (2) corresponding to the other “Blue 7” symbol, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that make up the “Blue 7” symbol, the “Red 7” symbol cannot be derived on the winning line, and constitute the chance eye When the big bonus (2) could not be won, and when no other role was won, one ball (2) could not be won. Legion corresponding to “Red 7” symbol Either because the error bonus or big bonus (1) was not able to prize winning is not known, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one ball (1) are respectively configured by the same “blue 7” symbol, The special symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one ball (2) are respectively composed of the same “red 7” symbol. And the specific symbol are composed of different symbols, and at least the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) or the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) A display mode in which one of the symbols stops on the winning line (a display mode in which the “red 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol stops in either the upper, middle, or lower level), The display mode in which the specific symbols that make up the combination of the ball (1) or one ball (2) stop on the winning line (the display mode in which the specific symbol stops at any one of the upper, middle, and lower levels) and the maximum pull-in respectively. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained as long as it is arranged beyond the range of 4 frames.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination of cherries from which more pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out in the normal gaming state is the left reel. The display mode (area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) that stops in any of the upper, middle, and lower levels, and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” that constitutes one ball (1) The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) where the symbol stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel is the maximum pull-in range, respectively. Since there are more than 4 frames, there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, and only one of the symbols can be aimed at. In addition, as described above, in the normal gaming state, more pachinko balls (prize balls) are paid out when a cherry is won than when one ball (1) wins. The timing at which the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination is aimed, that is, the “blue 7” symbol constituting one ball (1) combination cannot be stopped on the winning line, but the cherry combination is configured It is possible to increase the willingness to perform the stop operation at a timing at which the 6th “cherry” symbol can be stopped on any winning line.

  In addition, stop operation position (area number 6-12) where the number of draw-in frames for which the 6th “cherry” symbol is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line is determined, and 1 ball (1) wins Stop operation position (region number) where the number of pull-in frames for stopping “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is sometimes configured 4-8, region numbers 10-14) are partially overlapping, and when a stop operation is performed at these overlapping stop operation positions (region numbers 6-8, region numbers 10-12), If one ball (1) is won, the 2-4 symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” and the 8-10 symbol “Bell Red 7 Bell” will be stopped. Become. For this reason, in response to increasing the willingness to stop the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the cherry combination on any winning line, one ball (1 ) Can be increased when the display results constituting the chance eyes are derived.

  In this embodiment, cherry is applied as a special prize winning with a payout of more pachinko balls (award balls) than one ball (1) as a specific prize winning, but not limited to this. It is sufficient if the winning combination is established by stopping the winning combination on the winning line when the combination that includes the symbols constituting the combination of (1) is stopped on the winning line, and the winning is not achieved only by the left reel like cherry. It may be established when a corresponding symbol stops on a winning line of two or more reels.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous performance is executed when the chance is derived. In other words, since the continuous performance is executed in relation to the derivation of the chances that are likely to be won by the bonus, the player's expectation for the bonus is expressed by both the reel display result and the performance related to the display result. Can be increased.

  Further, when the reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely specified from the stop operation position, for example, the player performs the stop operation at a timing other than the stop operation position at which the chance eye can be derived. In some cases, such as when playing a game, the rate at which chances are derived is extremely reduced, but in this embodiment, a continuous production lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and a continuous production lottery is performed. Even in the case of winning, continuous production is executed. That is, even when the chance is not derived, if the continuous production lottery is won, the continuous production is executed. For this reason, even when the rate at which chance chances are derived is extremely reduced, a continuous effect is appropriately executed, so that a player's expectation on the bonus can be effectively increased.

  In this embodiment, when the chance chance is derived, that is, when the combination of the display results of all reels becomes the chance eye, a continuous effect, that is, a specific effect is executed. When applying the chance that is established when one of the reels is stopped, if any one of the reels is stopped and the chance is established, the specific effect is executed from that point. Anyway.

  Also, in this embodiment, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is applied as a specific effect indicating the possibility of winning any of the bonuses, and the bonus is won over a plurality of games as well as one game. However, for example, an effect that is executed only for the next game with a chance chance may be applied as a specific effect, or since the chance eye is derived. An effect executed until the next game starts may be applied as the specific effect.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the regular bonus is activated at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. During the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is activated for each game. When it is determined that it is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Also, while the big bonus is active, the regular bonus is always controlled, so the pachinko ball can be increased the fastest in the big bonus, so the regular bonus is activated with the JACIN winning as before. Rather than doing it, it is possible to increase the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the total number of paid-in pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus reaches the specified value (2326 balls in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. Thus, when the end condition is satisfied, the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If there is no regular bonus, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is inactive. If not, the regular bonus is activated, so the regular bonus will end despite the end of the big bonus. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the regular bonus starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in this embodiment) or the specified number of games (8 in this embodiment). ) The game ends when a winning occurs. However, the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may be completed only when it occurs. Also, the regular number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out and the number of net increase (the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out) is subtracted from the total number of pachinko balls consumed for setting the number of bets. The process may be terminated when it reaches, or may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total payout number of pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus reaches a specified value (2326 balls in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions, for example, when the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus reaches a specified value. If the number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular bonus ends, the end condition of the big bonus is The big bonus end condition may be satisfied by satisfying any of these conditions.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may always be controlled while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus, the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and it is not necessary to determine whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, before the regular bonus is activated again, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific prize such as so-called JACIN, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus. good.

  In this embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as a type of winning combination, a small role accompanied by paying out a pachinko ball (prize ball), a re-playing role that does not consume the pachinko ball for the number of bets in the next game. , Special roles that accompany game state transition are defined. The special role is accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and depends on the gaming state at that time, so it cannot be said to be a basic role. The playability of the slot machine is not just playing a game, but the player will acquire a pachinko ball (prize ball) according to the game result. It can be said that the small role is the most basic role. Here, the types of small roles include cherry, 1 ball (1), 1 ball (2), and a bell, and are defined as types of winning combinations in any gaming state. In this way, by defining the basic small combination as a winning combination regardless of the gaming state, the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  In the regular bonus game state, a small role (especially a bell) is won with a high probability and a very large number of pachinko balls (prize balls) can be obtained, so the player has high expectations for this. This regular bonus is not only transferred during the big bonus, but also when the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state. For this reason, even when the player is in the normal gaming state, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the regular bonus, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped after a maximum of 4 frames are drawn after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, and the symbols to be stopped can be selected from a range of 5 symbols. it can. Here, the symbols “Bell” and “Replay” are always arranged at intervals of 4 symbols or less on any of the left, middle and right reels. If you are doing it, you will not miss it. In particular, the bells in the regular bonus will be won with a very high probability, but this can not be missed, so in the regular bonus the player will not actually have to look forward. , You can easily advance the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to only the special role, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role The storage address of the corresponding number of decision values is registered, and in the internal lottery, the number of decision values of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table is added to the internal random number for the internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role is judged. And Betsuyaku and the general role is adapted to be elected at the same time. In other words, by making it possible to specify the range of judgment values for each of the general roles and special roles, and the range of determination values for which the general roles and special roles are selected in duplicate, from one role-specific table. , Special role and general role can be elected at the same time. As a result, even if the general role is won as a result of the game, the winning of the special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so the player's expectation for winning the special role is maintained even in such a situation Can be made.

  In this embodiment, the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and cherry, one ball (1) or one ball (2) can be won simultaneously, and the big bonus (1) or big bonus is also possible. Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) and the range of judgment values that Cherry wins at the same time than the range of judgment values that both the one ball (1) or 1 ball (2) wins at the same time The big bonus (1) or big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the probability of winning one ball (1) or one ball (2) at the same time are larger than the big bonus (1) or big bonus. (2) and the probability that Cherry will win at the same time is higher, so when Cherry wins than when 1 (1) or 1 (2) wins, Since the possibility of winning at the same time as the bonus (1) or big bonus (2) increases, the expectation of winning the special role will vary depending on the type of general role when the general role is won. Can increase interest.

  In this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role Store the storage address for the corresponding number of judgment values, and in the internal lottery, add the number of judgment values for each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table to the internal random number that was acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role should be judged. And special And general roles can be elected at the same time, but the role table for general roles where the storage addresses for general roles are registered and the special roles for which the storage addresses for the number of judgment values for special roles are registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the general role that refers to the role table for the general role and the special role that refers to the role-specific table for the special role In addition to performing the lottery separately, the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the general role table and the determination stored in the address area registered in the special role table By making it possible to specify from the number of values the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are each won, and the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are won in duplicate, General roles are elected at the same time Even if such a configuration is adopted, even if a general role wins as a result of the game, winning of a special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so this situation In this case, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination and combination of combinations registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but regardless of the set value. For the combination and combination of combinations that have the same winning probability, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses even if the target combination or combination of the internal lottery is the same and the number of determination values referenced according to the set value is different. May be the same.

  In general, in the development stage, it is assumed that the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of judgment values (that is, the winning probability) according to the set value (that is, adjusting the winning probability of the internal lottery) for at least some of the roles. Yes. As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether the result of the addition overflows, Whether or not each winning combination or winning combination is won is determined. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations as it is. In addition, when generating the winning determination table before the actual winning determination is performed, the loop processing is required twice. However, according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing may be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for internal lottery acquired by the random number acquisition process is not used as it is from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43 but is used after being processed by software. Yes. The random number generation circuit 42 generates a random number by updating at a high speed at the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a. However, in the random number for internal lottery after processing by software, the periodicity of the update is increased by the processing. It will be lost.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, since the number of determination values corresponding to each combination is sequentially added to the random value for the internal lottery, the combination of each combination or combination is won as shown in FIG. The value of the random number for internal lottery becomes solidified. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming as much as possible by losing the periodicity of the random numbers for internal lottery by processing by software and varying the values.

  Moreover, the frequency of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation circuit 42a for updating the values of the counters 42b and 42c of the random number generation circuit 42 is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a, and is not an integral multiple. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the update of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 to be synchronized with the process performed by the CPU 41a. In addition, by increasing the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a, the update speed of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 can be made extremely fast.

  On the other hand, the processing of the random number by software only needs to replace the upper byte and the lower byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43. Therefore, even a relatively large random number of 16 bits does not increase the load required for processing necessary to lose periodicity and can be easily acquired. Since a large random number can be acquired in this way, the probability setting in the internal lottery can be finely performed.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a process for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If it is executed for each game and the value read from the set value work is not in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the value stored in the set value work, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is a value of 1 to 6, and thus the value stored in the set value work is in the range of 1 to 6. If the value is not, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Further, a process for determining whether or not the set bet number is a bet number according to the gaming state is executed for each game, and the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state. Control of the error state due to the RAM abnormal error disables the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the number of bets corresponding to each gaming state is determined, but if the game is played with a bet number different from the bet number, is the data stored in the RAM 41c broken? Or, since there is a possibility that an unauthorized program is operating, even if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or illegal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the set value automatically set by the slot machine The game is executed based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, the setting value selected by the amusement store side). Since it is guaranteed that the game will be played, the fairness of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the winning prize is determined in the internal lottery process and it is determined that the value is not an appropriate setting value, the RAM 41c is controlled to be in a RAM abnormal error state. When the set value stored in the set value work is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), the winning of the winning is determined with a probability based on the initial value of the set value (for example, the set value 1). You may do it.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 is initialized for each game. Therefore, even if an unauthorized program is stored using the unused area of the RAM 41c, It is possible to prevent unauthorized programs from being resident.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, so that all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. For example, even if it is attempted to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to reside. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident, and for example, to add unauthorized data (such as an address specified by the unauthorized program) to the unused stack area, causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one, the original program Fraud can be prevented that would carry out the operation different from the. Furthermore, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, the area that would otherwise be able to store saved data is compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that constitutes the game control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything that can be initialized is acceptable.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are set for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, but the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for performing the conversion may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c may be initialized at the start of the game or when a process that is always executed for each game is executed. It may be one that performs the conversion.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when the four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, In addition to performing four types of initialization 1 to 4 which are initialized in different areas depending on each initialization condition, any of the four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and an unused area in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, it is possible to prevent the control state of the game control unit 41 from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error occurs due to a RAM error, and the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on. Until the initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, the progress of the game is impossible. Therefore, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of startup. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c Since the initialization 1 is performed, the malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the interruption interrupt process, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. After that, adjustment data for which the RAM parity is 0 based on all the data of the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data is stored, and in addition to the determination as to whether the RAM parity is 0 or not at the start, Is determined to be normal, and the RAM 41c is determined to be normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is also normally stored. The control state is restored based on the data stored in. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed, but the error state due to the RAM abnormality error occurs. When initialization is performed, all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1), and a reset operation is performed in this state. Thus, the game may be restarted.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41 a transmits a command according to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be made various. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port It is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA before performing the conversion or the like. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original process is performed. It is adapted to return.

  That is, a voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the game control unit 41, and the CPU 41a can execute the power interruption interrupt process even if the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a may be interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. More than necessary It is possible to prevent the load it takes.

  Further, other interruptions are prohibited during execution of the power interruption interruption process and the timer interruption process (A) (B). For example, the timer interruption process (A) (B) Even when a voltage drop signal is input during the execution of, no double interruption occurs, and it is possible to prevent the processing load of the CPU 41a from increasing or the consistency of data from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  Also, when the interrupt timing of power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of timer interrupt processing (A) or timer interrupt processing (B) are simultaneous, that is, interrupt 2 and interrupt 1 or interrupt If 0 occurs at the same time, interrupt 2 is prioritized, power interruption interrupt processing is executed, and interrupt 2 is generated during execution of timer interrupt processing (A) or timer interrupt processing (B) In such a case, the interruption interrupt process is executed after the timer interruption process is completed, and the interruption interruption process is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interruptions. The power interruption processing can be reliably performed before the driving of the CPU 41a is stopped.

  In addition, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 0 to 3, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original processing. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even when an unused interrupt 3 occurs, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. You can prevent problems.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 calculates and sets the RAM parity adjustment data every time the timer interrupt process (effect) is executed. In other words, the process for making it possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of restoration is performed periodically without depending on the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Even when the command is transmitted with a delay, the CPU 91a does not stop before calculating and setting the RAM parity adjustment data due to the delayed transmission of the command. The CPU 91a can accurately determine whether the data backed up in the RAM 91c is normal.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b are referred to. In addition, a stop control table is created for each spinning reel, but the internal control state for each gaming state and the stop control table for each reel stop state (and stopped stop position) are stored in the ROM 41b in advance. Based on the table index, it is possible to specify the necessary stop control table according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop state of the reel, and when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel Refer to the table index when the reels that have stopped and are still rotating still remain. By Le may be set a stop control table.

  In the above embodiment, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (one symbol) are defined for one reel, and the stop control table corresponds to each area (area number). Then, the reel is used by using the stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to the area where one symbol varies. For example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) are uniquely set for each area of less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, for every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. The reel stop control may be performed using a predetermined stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor, and the stop operation position Against can be further diversified the stop position.

  Moreover, in the said Example, among the some stop control tables which defined the number of drawing | drawing tops with respect to a stop operation position uniquely, each internal winning state of each game state, the reel stop condition (and stop position stopped) A stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the selected stop control table and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. Is used in place of the stop control table, and when the stop operation is detected, the stop position specifying table is referred to and the reel is stopped at the stop position uniquely specified corresponding to the stop operation position. You may do it.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that is uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the selected number of pull-in frames, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. It is also possible to perform kicking control (so-called control method control) in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. Since the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) by performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reel that has stopped first may be controlled to stop the reel by using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected and its control is performed. The reel stop control is performed according to the pattern, but at least a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern. If it is good.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the determination value number storage area | region of RAM41c in which the determination value number used for an internal lottery is memorize | stored shall memorize | store the determination value number in each case using a 2 byte area | region. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is related to the set value. Even common items can be individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said Example. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) for the same combination or combination of combinations at the same set value is different for each gaming state (state number). Was stored. That is, the same combination or combination of combinations with the same set value is stored separately even if the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) is the same, but the gaming state (state number) Regardless of the combination of combinations or combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability regardless, the storage address of the judgment value number is shared, or the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value and gaming state (state number) For the combination or combination of combinations, the storage address of the determination value number may be made common, and by storing the determination value number in common in this way, the storage capacity required for this is reduced. It will be enough.

  In the embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery, but from the value of random number for internal lottery that acquired the acquired determination value number, Subtraction may be performed sequentially, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and the addition result overflows The combination or combination of combinations was determined to be winning. On the other hand, a winning determination table that defines a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination as winning according to the number of determination values for each combination or combination according to the gaming state is determined for each game. The internal lottery may be performed by comparing the created and acquired random number value for internal lottery with the range of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations. In addition, a winning determination table in which a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination of combinations as winning is stored in the ROM 41b in advance, and the acquired random value for internal lottery is used as a range of determination values for each combination. It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing with.

  In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and the small role is won The number of pachinko balls (prize balls) to be paid out can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the number of bets in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of Bell is 1 / 4.82 and the number of payout balls is 35, but when 1 or 2 is set as the number of bets, The winning probability may be lower than 1 / 4.82 and the number of payout balls may be larger than 35 balls. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of balls to be paid out may be changed depending on whether 1 is set as the bet number or 2 is set.

  In the above embodiment, the entire high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is replaced with the low-order byte, and the entire low-order byte is replaced with the high-order byte. On the other hand, the data of a specific bit among the random number bits extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is simply replaced with data of other bits (however, other than the masked seventh and fifteenth bits). Also good. Alternatively, the random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be directly acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Further, it may be processed into a random number for internal lottery by a method different from the above embodiment.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram of a first modification of the process until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in the first modification, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal refresh register (R register) 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The value of the lower byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) is left as it is.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs an OR operation with the value of the general-purpose register 41GR, that is, a value obtained by adding a processing random number to the upper byte with 8080h. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of a second modification of the process until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in this example, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal R register 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). Further, the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R is also added to the lower byte value (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the general-purpose register 41GR.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs a logical OR operation with the value of the general-purpose register 41GR, that is, the value obtained by adding the processing random numbers to the upper byte and the lower byte, respectively, with 8080h. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  In the first and second modified examples described above, the value of the R register 41R is extracted as a random number for processing, and this is extracted from the high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 (in the second modified example, the lower byte) ) To process random numbers. The random number processing applied here includes at least processing for adding a processing random number to the upper byte. As a result, the variation in random numbers for internal lottery can be increased, and aiming by the player can be prevented as much as possible.

  Further, since the processing random numbers are extracted from the R register 41R, no special configuration is required as means for generating the processing random numbers. Moreover, the value of the R register 41R is updated every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction, and the update interval is not constant. Therefore, a random number with high randomness can be extracted as a processing random number. And since the randomness of the processing random number is high, the randomness of the random number for internal lottery generated using the random number is also high.

  In the first and second modified examples, the value extracted from the R register 41R is added to the upper byte (and the lower byte) of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. A value that is periodically updated by hardware or software may be added. Further, instead of adding a value extracted from the R register 41R (or a value instead of the R register), a logical operation such as subtraction, logical sum, or logical product may be performed.

  Further, bit replacement such as replacement of the upper byte and the lower byte shown in the above embodiment may be used in combination with the first and second modifications. Also in the first and second modified examples, the interruption to the CPU 41a is prohibited in order to prevent the contents of the HL register from being rewritten until the processing is completed after the random number is extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. Will be.

  In the second modification, processing random numbers to be added to the upper and lower bytes of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be separately extracted from the R register 41R at different timings. Separately prepare the processing random number to be added to the upper byte and the processing random number to be updated to the lower byte. Means for extracting may be provided. In this case, one of the means for updating the processing random number for the upper byte and the means for updating the processing random number for the lower byte can be constituted by the R register.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the case where the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42, that is, the random number extracted by the hardware random number function is processed by software has been described. However, the random number processing by the software described above may be applied to random numbers that are periodically updated by software. For example, the CPU 41a sends an instruction to the second microcomputer to extract a random number periodically updated by a timer interrupt or the like in a second microcomputer different from the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41, and I The data can be input to the CPU 41a via the / O port 41d and stored in the general-purpose register 41GR. The function of the second microcomputer may be included in the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41. Also in this case, the random number value obtained after processing can be varied, and the effect of preventing the player from aiming can be achieved.

  In the above, both the extracted random number and the processed random number are stored in the general-purpose register 41GR provided in the CPU 41a. In the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination is sequentially added to the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR. However, a random number after processing, that is, an acquired random number may be stored in the RAM 41c, and the number of determination values for each combination may be sequentially added to the value stored in the RAM 41c.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Although it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 at the time of restoration. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. The checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum is stored is calculated. If the result is 00 (H), it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and must be 00 (H). For example, it may be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is Since the result of calculating the checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00 (H), it is determined that the data of the RAM 41c is normal. This is because it can.

  In this case as well, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5A (H)) in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address, and at the time of restoration In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00 (H), it is also determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is normally stored. The checksum is 00 (H) and the destructive diagnosis is performed. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal on the condition that the business data is also normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00 (H) is stored in all areas, it will be determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, After storing the destructive diagnostic data with the bit set to 1, calculate the checksum and store it in a specific area, and also check the destructive diagnostic data in addition to checking the checksum at startup, For example, even if all areas are cleared to 0 at startup, and the checksum is 00 (H) and determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of power failure, Since the determination is made, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in the RAM 41c.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c is 00 (H). RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in a specific area, and the RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c is calculated at the time of recovery, and the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area is calculated. The data in the RAM 41c depends on whether the comparison result matches It may be determined whether normal or not. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above-described embodiment, 5A (H) is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 may be stored and can be confirmed at the time of startup.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is started, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. However, first, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and on condition that the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Without calculation, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  In the above embodiment, the game control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the game control unit 41. However, the game control unit 41 is connected to the reset circuit. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the above embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects the power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. You may make it detect a power interruption, when the period when the said DC voltage became below a fixed voltage continued for a fixed period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected or when the period continues for a certain period.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40, but it may be mounted in other places. For example, the game control board 40 may be mounted from the power supply board 100 or the power supply board 100. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line is connected.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine that uses a pachinko ball to set the number of bets is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and credits stored as game media owned by the player and A slot machine that uses a pachinko ball together to set the number of bets may be used.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42, in addition to the pachinko ball taking-in mechanism such as the taking-in motor 101, the sorting solenoid 102, the taking-in ball detecting switch 105, etc. constituting the taking-in device 100, the medal inserted from the outside The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching the flow path to either a hopper tank side or a medal payout exit side, which will be described later, provided inside, and a medal that flows from the outside and flows down to the hopper tank side In addition to a pachinko ball payout mechanism such as a payout motor 201 and a payout ball detection switch 202 that constitute a payout device 200, a hopper tank (not shown) that stores medals inserted from the outside is provided. ), A hopper motor 34 and a hopper motor 3 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening A payout sensor 35 is provided for detecting medals paid out by driving, and it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls. You may apply to the slot machine where is paid out.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a rear view of the slot machine. It is sectional drawing of the taking-in apparatus provided in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the wiring of a supply ball | bowl detection switch, a payout ball | bowl detection switch, and a payout ball clogging detection switch. It is a figure which shows the signal exchanged between a game control board, a payout control board, and a payout control board and a card unit. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when the operation | movement of a payment switch is detected when the prize accompanying payout of a prize ball | bowl generate | occur | produces, or the state where a taken-in ball | bowl remains. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. (A) is a figure showing a winning combination table. (B) is a figure which shows the classification table. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination. (A) is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a random number generation circuit. (B) is an explanatory diagram until the CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into a random number for internal lottery by software. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the external output signal output from a slot machine. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of BB signal and RB signal among external output signals. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a game control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process which CPU of a game control part performs when an error generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a game control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a game control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment control process which CPU of a game control part performs in a BET process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the taking-in control process which CPU of a game control part performs in a BET process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random number acquisition process which CPU of a game control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (A) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (A) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a game control part performs in a timer interruption process (A). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a game control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (effect) which CPU of an effect control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (effect) which CPU of an effect control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is explanatory drawing of the 1st modification of a process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd modification of a process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot Machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop Switch 40 Game Control Board 41 Game Control Unit 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
42 random number generating circuit 43 sampling circuit 90 effect control board 91 effect control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (13)

A variable display device capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable;
A take-in device for taking in game balls owned by the player;
An acquisition request operation unit operated when requesting the acquisition of game balls;
An intake control means for performing an intake control for causing the take-in device to take-in an action to take in a game ball by the take-in device when the take-in request operation unit is operated;
Bet number setting means for setting the bet number according to the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and a display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. Is a slot machine using a game ball in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a winning to occur before a display result of at least one variable display area is derived;
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Timing start means for starting timing based on the establishment of a predetermined timing start condition after the start of the game;
Derivation instruction means for instructing that the display result is derived in the variable display area when the derivation operation means is operated and when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measurement means starts timing. When,
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area when the derivation instruction means instructs to derive the display result to the variable display area;
With
The derivation control means includes
When the derivation instruction means instructs the derivation display means to derive the display result by operating the derivation operation means, the derivation operation means is configured to perform the control based on the control pattern according to the determination result of the prior determination means. An operation time derivation control means for performing control to derive a display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means;
When it is instructed that the display result is derived to the variable display area by the derivation instructing means when the predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, the display result is displayed when all the variable display areas are derived. Automatic derivation control means for controlling the derivation of the display result to the variable display area that is still changing so that the combination does not constitute a winning combination;
Including
The automatic derivation control means, for a variable display area other than the final variable display area for finally deriving the display result, displays the display result of the variable display area based on the control pattern according to the determination result of the prior determination means. The final variable display area is not based on the control pattern according to the determination result of the pre-decision means, and the combination of the display results constitutes a winning when all the variable display areas are derived. Control to derive the display result that is not a combination,
A slot machine using game balls characterized by this. The variable display device derives and displays a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Display device
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, a plurality of controls for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs the variable display area to derive the display result. Corresponding to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing unit instructs that the display result is derived from the pattern to the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived, and the determination result of the predetermination unit. Including a control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting the control pattern,
The operation time derivation control means and the automatic derivation control means are controlled by the control pattern selection means when the derivation instruction means instructs the derivation of the display result to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. Control for deriving, as a display result of the variable display area, a display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the deriving instruction means instructs to derive the control pattern selected for the variable display area As well as
The derivation of the control pattern selecting means may cause the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived to derive the display result even when the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is the same. Including different control pattern selection means for selecting a different control pattern for a variable display region for which a display result has not yet been derived when the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time pointed by the instruction means is a different number of steps.
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1. The variable display device derives and displays a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Display device
The derivation control means includes
Instructing that the display result is derived to the variable display area by the derivation instructing means for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. Control that uniquely selects a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time Including pattern selection means,
In the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation instruction means instructs the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived to be derived, Performing control to derive the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the instruction means instructs to derive, as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection unit is configured to specify a specific display result from at least one of the number of steps when the determination result of the prior determination unit is a first determination result. When a specific control pattern is selected, and the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result, the first specific control out of the number of steps Including a specific control pattern selection means for selecting a second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified from a larger number of steps than the pattern,
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1. The variable display device derives and displays a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Display device
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, a plurality of controls for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs the variable display area to derive the display result. A control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived from a pattern;
In the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation instruction means instructs the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived to be derived, Performing control to derive the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the instruction means instructs to derive, as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection unit is configured to specify a specific display result from at least one of the number of steps when the determination result of the prior determination unit is a first determination result. When a specific control pattern is selected, and the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result, the first specific control out of the number of steps Including a specific control pattern selection means for selecting a second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified from a larger number of steps than the pattern,
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1. The variable display device derives and displays a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Display device
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for notifying the possibility that the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result more advantageous to the player than the first determination result;
The derivation control means includes
Instructing that the display result is derived to the variable display area by the derivation instructing means for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. Control that uniquely selects a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time Including pattern selection means,
In the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation instruction means instructs the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived to be derived, Performing control to derive the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the instruction means instructs to derive, as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result and the second determination result, from at least one of the number of steps. Including a specific control pattern selecting means for selecting a specific control pattern in which a specific display result is specified,
The specific effect executing means is
A first specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect when a combination of display results of the plurality of variable display areas becomes a specific combination including the specific display result;
Specific production determining means for determining whether to execute the specific production;
When the specific effect determining means determines to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is executed regardless of whether or not the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas is the specific combination. Two specific performance execution means;
including,
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1. The variable display device derives and displays a display result in each of the plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Display device
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for notifying the possibility that the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result more advantageous to the player than the first determination result;
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, a plurality of controls for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation instructing means instructs the variable display area to derive the display result. A control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived from a pattern;
In the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation instruction means instructs the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived to be derived, Performing control to derive the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time when the instruction means instructs to derive, as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result and the second determination result, from at least one of the number of steps. Including a specific control pattern selecting means for selecting a specific control pattern in which a specific display result is specified,
The specific effect executing means is
A first specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect when a combination of display results of the plurality of variable display areas becomes a specific combination including the specific display result;
Specific production determining means for determining whether to execute the specific production;
When the specific effect determining means determines to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is executed regardless of whether or not the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas is the specific combination. Two specific performance execution means;
including,
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1. Data storage means having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
An allowable stage selection means for selecting one of the allowable stages from a plurality of allowable stages having different ratios for determining whether or not the generation of the winning is permitted based on an operation of the predetermined setting operation means; ,
A permissible stage setting means for setting data indicating a permissible stage selected by the permissible stage selection means in a permissible stage storage area assigned to the storage area of the data storage means;
With
The pre-determining unit reads data indicating an allowable level stored in the allowable level storage area, and determines whether or not to allow a prize to be generated at a rate corresponding to the allowable level indicated by the read data. With
The slot machine using the game ball further includes:
Stored data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determination means determines that the data stored in the data storage means is not normal;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. A disabling release means for releasing the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed,
Comprising
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1. Data storage means having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
An allowable stage selection means for selecting one of the allowable stages from a plurality of allowable stages having different ratios for determining whether or not the generation of the winning is permitted based on an operation of the predetermined setting operation means; ,
A permissible stage setting means for setting data indicating a permissible stage selected by the permissible stage selection means in a permissible stage storage area assigned to the storage area of the data storage means;
With
The pre-determining unit reads data indicating an allowable level stored in the allowable level storage area, and determines whether or not to allow a prize to be generated at a rate corresponding to the allowable level indicated by the read data. With
The slot machine using the game ball further includes:
A permissible step data determining means for determining whether or not the data indicating the permissible step stored in the permissible step storage area for each game is appropriate data indicating a permissible step selectable by the permissible step selecting means; ,
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when it is determined by the allowable stage data determination means that the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area is not appropriate data;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. A disabling release means for releasing the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed,
Comprising
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1. When a display result is derived for all of the variable display areas, there is provided a winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning is made according to a combination of symbols stopped in each of a plurality of winning lines across all the variable display areas. ,
The operation time derivation control means and the automatic derivation control means are:
In the game in which it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of a specific winning is permitted, when the display result is derived in the variable display area in a specific order, the plurality of winnings are excluded except for the final variable display area. Control is performed to derive a display result in the variable display area based on the first control pattern in which a combination of symbols corresponding to the specific winning can be arranged on any winning line of the line, other than the specific order When the display results are derived in order in the variable display area, a combination of symbols corresponding to the specific winning can be arranged only on the specific winning line among the plurality of winning lines except for the final variable display area. Based on the control pattern of 2, control to derive the display result in the variable display area,
The derivation instructing means determines a predetermined number other than the specific order when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed in a state where at least two or more variable display areas are still changing after the time measuring means starts timing. Instructing the display result to be derived in the variable display area in the order given,
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 8. The pre-determining means determines whether or not to allow the generation of a prize including a special prize that is established only by deriving a special display result in any one specific variable display area,
The derivation instructing means is configured such that when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses in a state where at least two variable display areas including at least the specific variable display area are still changing after the time measuring means starts timing, Instructing the display result to be derived in the variable display area in a predetermined order lasting from the specific variable display area.
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 9. Derivation for invalidating the operation of the derivation operation means during a period from when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measurement means has started to measure until display results are derived in at least all variable display areas. Comprising operation invalidation means,
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 10. The operation time derivation control means has a display mode different from the combination of display results corresponding to the special prize when it is determined by the prior decision means that the occurrence of a special prize advantageous to the player is allowed. Yes, it is a combination that is not derived when it is not determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, and it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted. While performing the control to derive the display result in the variable display area based on the control pattern capable of deriving a predetermined combination,
In the slot machine using the game ball, when the display result is derived to the variable display area by the automatic derivation control means, even if the combination of the display results of the variable display area is a predetermined combination, the special prize Including a display result invalid notification means for notifying that it is not determined that the occurrence of the
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 11. Winning acceptance notifying means for notifying that it is determined by the predetermining means that the generation of any winning is permitted before display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas;
When the display result is derived in the variable display area by the automatic derivation control means, the winning allowance notification invalid notification means for notifying that the notification by the winning allowance notification means is invalid;
Comprising
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 12.

Images